AS-Interface

I/O Modules for Operation

6/2 Introduction in the Control Cabinet, IP20
6/2 Transmission technology
6/101 Introduction
6/3 Configuration examples
6/102 SlimLine
6/4 Communications overview
6/104 F90 module
6/5 AS-Interface specification
6/104 Flat module
6/7 ASIsafe Special integrated solutions
6/7 Introduction 6/105 AS-Interface communication modules
6/8 AS-Interface safety monitors Modules with special functions
6/12 AS-Interface safety modules 6/108 Counter modules
6/15 3SF1 Position Switches 6/109 Ground-fault detection modules
6/16 – Plastic enclosures Overvoltage protection module
6/18 – Metal enclosures 6/110 Modules with special functions
6/20 3SF1 Position Switches with Overvoltage protection module
Separate Actuator
Motor starters for operation
6/21 – Plastic enclosures
in the control cabinet
6/22 – Metal enclosures
6/23 3SF1 Position Switches with Tumbler 6/111 3RA6 compact feeders
6/24 – Plastic enclosures – General data
6/25 – Metal enclosures 6/113 – 3RA61 direct-on-line starters
6/26 3SF1 hinge switches 6/114 – 3RA62 reversing starters
– Plastic enclosures 6/115 – Accessories for 3RA6 direct-on-line
6/27 – Metal enclosures and reversing starters
6/28 AS-Interface F adapters 6/120 – Infeed system for 3RA6
for EMERGENCY STOP control devices Motor starters for operation in the field,
6/29 EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons high degree of protection
for AS-Interface 6/127 AS-Interface compact starters, 400 V AC
6/30 3SF2 AS-Interface cable-operated switches 6/130 3RK1 3 ECOFAST motor starters
6/31 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and soft starters
SIMATIC FS400 IP65/67 Motor Starters
light curtains and light grids and Load Feeders
6/36 3SF78 44 ASIsafe series 6/131 Motor starters, 24 V DC
internal evaluation, Type 4 IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
6/42 3SF78 42 ASIsafe series 6/133 AS-Interface load feeder module
external evaluation, Type 4 6/135 SIRIUS soft starters
6/49 3RG78 46 series, Internal evaluation, 3SF5 Pushbutton Units and
Type 4, Standard function package, Indicator Lights
transistor output
6/136 AS-Interface Enclosure – General Data
6/53 3RG78 43 series, Internal evaluation,
6/137 AS-Interface enclosures
Type 2, Standard Function package,
with standard fittings
Transistor output
6/138 Components for AS-Interface enclosures
6/57 Mounting parts
6/139 Customer-specific AS-Interface
6/66 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner enclosures
6/60 ASIsafe laser scanner 6/140 AS-Interface front panel module
6/145 AS-Interface connections for LOGO!
6/73 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7 6/146 AS-Interface Power supply units
6/73 CP 142-2 6/146 AS-Interface power supplies, IP20
6/75 CP 243-2
6/147 Transmission Media
6/77 CP 343-2
6/147 AS-Interface shaped cables
6/79 CP 343-2 P
Network transitions 6/148 System components and accessories
6/81 Notes 6/148 Repeater/extender
6/150 Extension plugs
6/82 AS-Interface Slaves 6/153 Addressing units
I/O modules for operation in the field 6/154 AS-Interface analyzers
6/82 Introduction 6/157 Miscellaneous accessories
6/83 Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K60
6/85 Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K – K60R
6/88 Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K45
6/90 Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
6/96 Digital I/O modules, IP67 – user modules
6/97 Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60

Siemens IK PI · 2009
 AS-Interface
Introduction
Transmission technology

■ Overview AS-Interface

The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accor- The AS-Interface is a single master system. For automation sys-
dance with EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for fieldbus communica- tems from Siemens, there are communications processors (CPs)
tion. Leading manufacturers of actuators and sensors worldwide and network transitions (Links) that function as masters to con-
support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical specifica- trol process or field communication as well as sensors and actu-
tions of the AS-Interface Association are made open to inter- ators that are accessed as AS-Interface slaves.
ested companies.

,QWHUQHW3DG 3&
&HOO
SKRQH
3&

0RWLRQ
7HOHVHUYLFH &RQWURO
6\VWHPV
7HOHFRQWURO
+0,V\VWHPV DQGVWDWLRQ
:/$1
&RQWUROOHU

6HFXULW\
352),1(7

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 1RWHERRN ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

$FFHVV
3RLQW

1RWHERRN &RQWUROOHU ,:/$1

5&RD[&DEOH 0RELOH3DQHOV

)LHOGGHYLFHIRU
KD]DUGRXVDUHD 3&3*,3&
+0,V\VWHPV /LQN

&RXSOHU
352),1(7

6 352),%863$ )LHOGGHYLFHV
0DFKLQH
9LVLRQ

0RWLRQ
&RQWURO 6\VWHP $FFHVV
0DFKLQH 6\VWHPV 3RLQW
9LVLRQ /LQN ,2/LQN
,2OLQN
,2 OLQN
3RZHU PRGXOH /LQN
VXSSO\ 3RZHU &OLHQW
/2*2 VXSSO\ 0RGXOH
&RQWUROOHU

3UR[LPLW\ 3UR[LPLW\
VZLWFKHV VZLWFKHV

*B,.B;;B
.1; $6,QWHUIDFH
5$ )LHOG
IXVHOHVV GHYLFH
FRPSDFW
6HQVRUV 6ODYHV VWDUWHU 6LJQDOLQJ 6ODYHV &RPSDFW
FROXPQ VWDUWHU

■ Benefits ■ Function
Operating modes
In general, the following operating modes are distinguished with
the master interface modules:
An important characteristic of the AS-Interface technology is the I/O data exchange
use of a common two-core cable for data transmission and
In this operating mode, the inputs and outputs of the binary
distribution of auxiliary power to the sensors and actuators.
AS-Interface slaves are read and written to.
For distributing the auxiliary power, an AS-Interface power sup-
ply is used which satisfies the requirements of the AS-Interface Analog value transmission
transmission procedure. The AS-Interface cable is mechanically AS-Interface master in accordance with AS-Interface specifica-
coded which prevents polarity reversal during wiring, and the tion V2.1 or V3.0 support integral analog value processing. This
insulation displacement methods allows easy contact. makes data exchange with analog AS-Interface slaves (in accor-
Complex control cable wiring in the control cabinet and terminal dance with analog profile 7.3 or 7.4) as easy as with digital
blocks can be replaced with AS-Interface. slaves.
Thanks to a specially developed cable and insulation displace- Command interface
ment technology, the AS-Interface cable can be connected any- As well as I/O data exchange with binary and analog AS-Inter-
where. face slaves, the AS-Interface masters provide a range of other
This concept results in enormous flexibility and significant cost functions using the command interface.
savings. Thus for example, slave addresses can be allocated, parameter
values can be transferred or diagnostics information can be
read out from user programs.

6/2 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
Introduction
Configuration examples

■ Design
Process or field communication
AS-Interface is used wherever individual actuators and sensors In practice, this means: Installation runs smoothly because data
are distributed throughout the machine (e.g. in a bottling plant or and power are transported together on one cable. No special
production line, etc.). expertise is required for installation and start-up. Furthermore,
AS-Interface replaces complex cable trees and connects binary through simple cable laying and the clear cable structure as well
and analog actuators and sensors such as proximity switches, as the special design of the cable, you not only significantly
valves or LEDs to a programmable controller such as SIMATIC reduce the risk of errors but also the service and maintenance
or a PC. costs.

6,0$7,& 2QH$6L0DVWHULV
6,027,21 FRQQHFWHGIRUHDFK$6L
QHWZRUN

352),1(7

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3
'3$6L)/LQN $6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU $6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG 6
6
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
$6,QWHUIDFH
SRZHUVXSSO\ 6,027,21&

6
6 6 ,($6L/,1.31,2

$6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU $6,QWHUIDFH
$6,QWHUIDFH
ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS 5HSHDWHU SRZHUVXSSO\
9'&
/2*2 SRZHUVXSSO\
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK $6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU
SHUVHJPHQW ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK
SHUVHJPHQW
+DQGKHOG
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
RSHUDWRUSDQHO ,2PRGXOH
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
'LJLWDODQDORJ

6HFXUHVODYH
ZLWK(0(5*(1&<
5$ &RPSDFW
6723
IXVHOHVV VWDUWHU
FRPSDFW ,3
6LJQDO VWDUWHU
HYDOXDWLRQ
$6LH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
*B,.B;;B

IRUVHJPHQWOHQJWK
XSWRP
6DIHW\
PRQLWRU

System configuration example

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/3

 AS-Interface
Introduction
Communications overview

■ Overview ■ Technical specifications

System components Standard EN 50295 / IEC 61158

Numerous system components are offered to implement the Topology Line, star or tree topology
(same as electrical installation)
communication. The main components of a system installation
are: Transmission medium unshielded twisted pair
(2 x 1.5 mm2) for data and
• Master interfaces for central control units such as SIMATIC S5 auxiliary power
and SIMATIC S7, ET 200 M distributed I/O,
Cables and connections Contacting of the
• The AS-Interface shaped cable, AS-Interface cable using
• Network components such as repeaters/extenders, insulation displacement
• The power supply unit for supplying the slaves, modules for Max. cable length 100 m without Repeater/Extender;
connecting standard sensors and actuators, 200 m with Extension Plug;
300 m with Repeater or Extender;
• Actuators and sensors with an integrated slave ASIC, 600 m with Repeater/Extender
• Secure modules for transferring secure data over and Extension Plug (repeaters
AS-Interface, connected in parallel)
• The address programmer for setting the slave address. Max. cycle time 5 ms at maximum capacity,
10 ms if A/B method is used,
profile-specific with spec 3.0
$6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU slaves;
Number of stations per AS-Interface 31 slaves acc. to AS-Interface
segment spec. V2.0 ;
6,0$7,&6 62 slaves (A/B method) in
accordance with AS-Interface
&3 spec. V2.1 and V3.0
&33 integrated analog value
transmission
Number of binary sensors/actuators max. 124 I/124 O
acc. to spec. V2.0;
6,027,21&
max. 248 I /186 O
6 &33 acc. to spec. V2.1;
max. 496 I /496 O
acc. to spec. 3.0
Access methods Cyclic polling master/slave
6,0$7,&6 procedure, cycle data reception
by host (PLC, PC)
&3
Error protection Identification and resending of
faulty messages

■ More Information
$6,QWHUIDFHOLQNV
Please note the operating framework conditions in each case for
the specified SIMATIC NET products (Order No. 6GK..., 6XV1...),
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG which you will find on the Internet page listed below.
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
 '3$6L)/LQN Additional information is available in the Internet under:
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

352),%86 $6,QWHUIDFH
*B,.B;;B

,($6L/,1.31,2
352),1(7

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW $6,QWHUIDFH

AS-Interface master and AS-Interface Links (see network transitions)

6/4 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface

AS-Interface specification

■ Overview

• 4DI/4DO in A/B technology

• 8DI/8DO in A/B technology
• Additional analog profiles
• Transmission of serial data
Speed/Flexibility

• Safety monitor
• Safe input slaves
ASi Spec. V3.0

• 62 Slaves (10 ms)

• Analog profiles
• Diagnostics peripherals ASIsafe

• 31 Slaves
• 5 ms bus cycle time ASi Spec. V2.1

NSA0_00453a
ASi Spec. V2.0

6
1994 1998 2001 2005/2006

Technology development of the AS-Interface

System limitations of AS-Interface specification

AS-Interface specification Maximum number of slaves Number of digital inputs Number of digital outputs
Digital Analog ASIsafe
Version 2.0 31 31 31 31 × 4 = 124 31 × 4 = 124
Version 2.1 62 31 31 62 × 4 = 248 62 × 3 = 186
Version 3.0 62 62 31 62 × 8 = 496 62 × 8 = 496

Expansions of AS-Interface Specification 2.1 Expansions of AS-Interface specification 3.0

• AS-Interface Specification 2.1 enables the number of network • The AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables connection of a
stations to be doubled from 31 to 62. Using the so-called maximum of 1000 digital inputs/outputs (profile S-7.A.A:
expanded addressing system, the 31 addresses available in 8DI/8DO as A/B slave).
an AS-Interface network can be split into two. • New profiles have also enabled the option of expanded
• If this option is used for each of the 31 slaves, the maximum addressing for analog slaves.
number of stations in an AS-Interface network is then 62. The • Acceleration of analog value transfer through "Fast Analog
so-called A/B slaves can have a maximum of four inputs and Profile".
three outputs. Expanded addressing is only possible for digi-
tal slaves, not for analog slaves and safety-oriented slaves • Variable use of analog modules: Optional parameterization
(ASIsafe). of resolution (12/14 bit) and 1 and 2-channel capability.
• Another function of the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 is the • Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud bidirec-
integrated analog value transfer function. In this case "inte- tional.
grated" means that no special function blocks are required for
accessing the analog values. It is just as easy to access the
analog values as the digital values. The integrated analog
value transfer function can be used with analog slaves which
support the profiles 7.3 and 7.4.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/5

 AS-Interface

AS-Interface specification

■ Overview (continued)
AS-Interface master
To be able to operate A/B slaves on an AS-Interface network you The subaddress of A/B slaves is set to "A" in the as-delivered
must also use master modules that meet the minimum require- state.
ments of Specification 2.1.
The new masters that comply with Specification 3.0 support all
A/B technology is supported by the masters of the SIMATIC S7 new slave profiles, but are also fully backwards compatible.
and the DP/AS-Interface links from Siemens. Only standard
slaves and A slaves (= A/B slave with an A address) can be
operated on masters which do not support Specification 2.1.
AS-Interface specification Available masters
Version 2.1 S7-200 (CP 243-2), DP/ASi Link 20E
Version 3.0 DP/AS-i Link Advanced, DP/AS-i F-Link,
IE/AS-i Link PN IO, S7-300 (CP 343-2, 343-2P)

The AS-Interface specification relevant for the respective slave

can be found in the section Selection and ordering data.
The exact slave profile is shown in the section
Technical Specifications in Technical information LV 1 T
Communication cycle
AS-Interface specification Maximum cycle time Slave profile
Version 2.0 5 ms S-X.0, S-X.1, S-X.F
Version 2.1 5 ms with 31 slaves S-X.A, S-7.3, S-7.4, S-7.F
10 ms with 62 slaves
Version 3.0 as for Version 2.1, and profile-specific 10 ms for S-7.5.5;
inputs/outputs (e.g. 20 ms for 4DI/4DO and 40 ms for S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5;

6
8DI/8DO) S-7.A.7, S-7.A.8;
S-7.A.9, S-7.A.A, S-6.0

Standard slaves are queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: Whether an AS-Interface slave is a standard slave or an A/B
5 ms). If only one A or B slave is installed at an address, this slave is noted in the section Selection and Ordering data in the
slave will be queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If an column Slave Type and can be deduced from the section
A/B slave pair is installed at an address, the A slave will be que- Technical Specifications of the slave in question in the Technical
ried in one cycle and the B slave in the next cycle (max. cycle information LV 1 T.
time: 10 ms). If only standard and/or A slaves are installed in a
network, the cycle time is identical to the standard masters (max. All slave types can be combined within a single AS-Interface
cycle time: 5 ms). network.

■ Benefits
• Lower costs for masters and power supply units thanks to
increased number of slaves or I/Os per AS-Interface string
• Enhanced decentralization in installations with numerous,
widely distributed signals
• Existing AS-Interface systems can be expanded further

■ More information
More information pertaining to AS-Interface is available in the
AS-Interface system manual.
The German AS-Interface system manual is available free of
charge as a download in the Internet under
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26250840
The English AS-Interface system manual is available free of
charge as a download in the Internet under
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840
The AS-Interface system manual is also available in print in both
languages, see under "System Components and Accessories"
--> "Miscellaneous Accessories".

6/6 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Introduction

■ Overview

Power
Standard PLC supply unit
Standard-Master

AS-i POWER
Safety monitor

Standard-
Slave

AS-Interface

Safe slave with

EMERGENCY
STOP

Signal evaluation of slave/safety monitor

Secure communication and standard communication on AS-Interface

Safety is included
■ Benefits
The ASIsafe concept supports the integration of safety-related
• No failsafe PLC or special master is required for the ASIsafe
components, such as EMERGENCY STOP switches, protective
door switches or safety light arrays, directly in the AS-Interface
network. These are fully compatible with the familiar AS-Interface
Solution local (safety monitor)
• Alternatively integration in SIMATIC / SINUMERIK safety
6
components (masters, slaves, power supplies, repeaters, etc.) architectures with the help of DP/AS-i F-Link (ASIsafe Solution
according to IEC 62062/EN 50295 and are operated in conjunc- PROFIsafe)
tion with them on the yellow AS-Interface cable. • Simple system structure thanks to standardized AS-Interface
The signals of the safety sensors are evaluated by a safety technique
monitor which not only monitors the switching signals of the • Safety-related and standard data on the same bus
safety sensors but also continuously checks that the data trans- • Existing systems can be expanded quickly and easily
mission works correctly. The safety monitor has one or two en-
abling circuits which are configured with two channels and are • Optimum integration in TIA (Safety Diagnostics) and
used to switch the machine or plant to the safe state. Sensors Safety Integrated
and monitors can be connected to any points of the AS-Interface • Safe signals can be combined in groups
network. Also, several monitors can be used on one network. • Inclusion of the safety signals in the plant diagnostics,
A failsafe controller or a special master is not required. The also on existing HMI panels
master regards safety slaves like all other slaves and receives • Approved to Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1 or PL e acc. to
the safety data solely for information purposes. Hence it is also EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 acc. to IEC 61508
possible to expand all existing AS-Interface networks. • ASIsafe is certified by TÜV (Germany), NRTL (USA) and
ASIsafe ensures a maximum response time of 40 ms. This is the INRS (France)
time between the signal being applied to the input of the safe
slave and the output on the safety monitor being switched off. ■ Application
Tested safety Integrated safety technology in the AS-Interface system is used
The system was tested and approved by TÜV (Germany), wherever EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons, protective door
NRTL (USA) and INRS (France). The transmission method interlocks, stop Category 0 and 1, two-hand operator controls
for safety-oriented signals is designed so that applications and light arrays now installed.
up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1 and PL e according to
EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 respectively
can be realized.
Software
The safety-oriented applications can be compiled and trans-
ferred into the monitor using the "asimon" configuration software.
The software also enables online diagnostics.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/7

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors

■ Overview ■ Application
The safety monitor acts as a "bus-based safety relay". It provides
a user-friendly introduction to safety-orientated communication
over fieldbuses thanks to its simple configuration using the
graphic PC software asimon.
The standard infrastructure of the AS-i network (AS-i master
under standard PLC, AS-i power supply unit) can still be used
without restriction.
The monitor comes in three expansion levels:
• Basic safety monitor
with starter set of modules and basic functionality
• Expanded safety monitor
with expanded features and functionality
• The expanded safety monitor is also available as a version
with integrated safe slave which can be used for the control of
a distributed safe AS-i output or for safe coupling of a switch
signal on another safety monitor or F-Link.
Basic safety monitor versus –
Safety monitor in screw terminal version expanded safety monitor
(removable terminals) Basic safety Expanded
monitor safety monitor
The safety monitor is the centerpiece of ASIsafe Solution local.
It enables safety-orientated responding to signals from the Number of monitoring modules 32 48
ASIsafe (input) slaves on the same AS-i network and has 1-2 Number of OR gates (inputs) 2 6
enabling circuits. A safe application is configured using a PC. Number of AND gates (inputs) -- 6
Various application-specific operating modes can be selected
for this. They include, for example, an EMERGENCY STOP Wildcards for monitoring modules ✓ ✓
function, door tumbler and selection of stop Category 0 or Deactivating of monitoring modules ✓ ✓
6 Category 1.
To be able to make full use of the AS-Interface diagnostics
Fault release ✓ ✓
Diagnostics hold ✓ ✓
options, the monitor can also be operated with an AS interface
address if required. With the help of the diagnostics module for A/B slaves for acknowledgment ✓ ✓
STEP 7, which is included on the ASIsafe CD, the full diagnostics Safe time functions -- ✓
spectrum can be processed further in the higher-level PLC.
"Button" function -- ✓
The AS-Interface safety monitor is currently offered in the latest
Debouncing of contacts -- ✓
Version 3 (Firmware V3.x) and is available in three expansion
levels. Both basic/expanded expansion levels are available Filtering out of brief disconnections -- ✓ (as of
with one or two-channeled configured enabling circuits. The Version 3)
expanded safety monitor is also available as a version with Control of safe -- ✓ (in version
integrated safe slave which can be used for the control of a safe AS-i output/safe coupling with integrated
AS-i output or for safe coupling of a switch signal on another safe slave)
safety monitor or F-Link.
The safety monitor is used in an AS-Interface bus system to Number of monitoring modules
monitor protective devices, e.g. protective doors, EMERGENCY The number of devices which the safety monitor can process
STOP switches etc. is increased with the expanded safety monitor from 32 to 48.
The safety monitor can be used up to Category 4 acc. to Applications of greater complexity and size can thus be simu-
EN 954-1, to PL e acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 and to SIL 3 acc. lated in the safety monitor.
to IEC 61508. Logic OR operation
The safety characteristics for the maximum ON period of At the logic operation level two elements can be linked by OR
12 months and maximum service life of 20 years are: operations in the basic version and up to six in the expanded
• PFD: 7.2 x 10-5 version.
• PFH: 9.1 x 10-9 Logic AND operation
The user must calculate the PFD value of the total loop. In addition to the standard AND operation in the main path of
Important: Depending on the choice of safety components used, an enabling circuit, an AND operation can also be inserted in an
the complete safety system may also be classified in a lower OR operation on the expanded safety monitor. More than two
safety category. elements can be linked in this AND.

The safety monitor is mounted on a standard mounting rail.

Disassembly from the standard mounting rail is quick and easy
and requires no tools. With an additional accessory (push-in
lugs), the safety monitor can also be screwed on.

6/8 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors

■ Application (continued)
Features of the basic safety monitor Additional features of the expanded safety monitor with
• Wildcards and deactivating of monitoring modules Wildcards integrated safe slave
are available for the configuration. These wildcards are inte- This new safety monitor type offers the additional features of
grated in the configuration and diagnostics and can be acti- the expanded safety monitor listed above plus the following
vated very easily if required. User-friendly and easy configur- features:
ing is thus possible even when system configurations change.
• Actuating a safe distributed actuator (safe output module of
• Fault release: e.g. safe valves or motor starters) parallel to the 2nd enabling
If a module detects a fault, the AS-Interface safety monitor circuit.
goes into fault status. A differentiated fault release (reset) is
now possible for this scenario. The fault release can be acti- • Alternatively: Use as a "safe coupler" between two ASIsafe
vated by an AS-Interface standard slave, e.g. a pushbutton, networks. A safe input signal on network 1 can thus act on an
and is effective only on module level. The great advantage of enabling circuit of network 2. A detour through a hard-wired
this is that the entire safety monitor is no longer reset but only safe input module on network 2 is not required in this case.
the module which is locked in the fault. Configuration software asimon V3: New features
• Diagnostics hold: • Multi-window system
Disconnections can be "frozen" until an acknowledgment
comes through a standard slave. This function provides valu- • Creation of the safety logic in graphic function diagram form,
able help in the event of short-time causes of disconnection. with changeover to former tree presentation possible
• Also from Version 3 upwards: • No "preprocessing" of the safety logic
The standard output data bits of safe input slaves can be • Management of user-specific modules
processed for acknowledgment, fault release and other non- • Downward compatibility:
safety-oriented signals. - Existing asimon V2 projects can be loaded
Additional features of the expanded safety monitor - can also be used on all former versions of the safety monitor
- with the corresponding scope of functions
The following additional features are provided by only the • Graphic printout of the safety logic
expanded safety monitor:
• Easier system start-up:
• Safe time functions: - Teaching the code sequences of safe AS-i Slaves step-by-
6
Timers with the following functions are available: step
- ON-delay - Manual input of code sequences also possible in addition
- OFF-delay and - Selectable number of simulated slaves
- Pulse
• Simpler diagnostics using AS-Interface through assignment of
• "Button" function: a diagnostics index to the software function block
Additional acknowledgment option for restarting the system
using an additional button. The button function can be • Signaling the switching state of the signaling and relay outputs
assigned to any input or output signal of a standard slave to a higher-level PLC using a simulated
through configuration in the asimon software. AS-Interface slave
• Debouncing of contacts: • New functions for filtering out brief interruptions and for
For debouncing the contacts it is possible to set a bounce controlling a safe AS-i output or for safe coupling of two
time after which a system restart takes place. AS-i networks
• Also from Version 3 upwards:
Filtering out of brief single-channel interruptions in the sensor
circuit.
A tolerance time can be set during which the brief opening of
a safety-oriented input contact is ignored in order to increase
plant availability.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/9

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors

■ Application (continued)

Interface of the configuration software asimon V3

6/10 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety monitors

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Basic safety monitor Screw terminals
Version 3
With screw terminal, removable screw terminals
• An enabling circuit 3RK1 105-1AE04-0CA0
(monitor type 1)
• Two enabling circuits 3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0
(monitor type 2)
Expanded safety monitor
Version 3
With screw terminal, removable screw terminals
• An enabling circuit 3RK1 105-1AE04-2CA0
3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0
(monitor type 3)
• Two enabling circuits 3RK1 105-1BE04-2CA0
(monitor type 4)
Expanded safety monitor with integrated safe slave
Version 3
With spring-loaded terminals, removable screw terminals
• Two enabling circuits including control of a 3RK1 105-1BE04-4CA0
safe AS-i output/safe coupling
(monitor type 6)
Basic safety monitor Spring-loaded terminals
Version 3
With spring-loaded terminals, removable terminals
• An enabling circuit 3RK1 105-1AG04-0CA0
(monitor type 1)
• Two enabling circuits 3RK1 105-1BG04-0CA0
(monitor type 2)
Expanded safety monitor
Version 3 6
With spring-loaded terminals, removable terminals
• An enabling circuit 3RK1 105-1AG04-2CA0
(monitor type 3)
• Two enabling circuits 3RK1 105-1BG04-2CA0
(monitor type 4)
Expanded safety monitor with integrated safe slave
Version 3
With removable screw terminals
• Two enabling circuits including control of a 3RK1 105-1BG04-4CA0
safe AS-i output/safe coupling
(monitor type 6)
Accessories
ASIsafe CD 3RK1 802-2FB06-0GA1
Included in the scope of supply:
• asimon V3 configuration software
on CD ROM, for PC
(Windows 95/98, ME, 2000, NT, XP, Vista Business/Ultimate 32)
• Diagnostics package for STEP 7
including ready-to-use HMI templates for WinCCflex
• Extensive documentation (manuals and certificates)
Cable sets 3RK1 901-5AA00
Included in the scope of supply:
• PC configuration cable for communication between PC
(serial interface) and safety monitor,
length approx. 150 cm
• Transfer cable between two safety monitors,
length approx. 25 cm
3RK1 901-5AA00
USB/serial adapter 3UF7 946-0AA00-0
To connect a serial PC cable
(for connection to serial PC interface/RS 232)
to the USB port of a PC
etc. recommended for use in conjunction with
• AS-i safety monitor
Sealable covers 3RP1 902
For securing against unauthorized configuration of the safety monitor
Push-in lugs 3RP1 903
For screw fixing

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/11

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety modules

■ Overview
Following modules are available for selection:
K20F compact safety modules for operation in the field
Being only 20 mm wide, the K20F module is particularly well
suited for applications where modules need to be arranged in
the most confined space. The K20F modules are connected to
the AS-Interface with a round cable with M12 cable box instead
of with the AS-Interface flat cable. This enables extremely com-
pact installation. The flexibility of the round cable means that it
can also be used on moving machine parts without any prob-
lems. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as
their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in
weight.
K45F compact safety modules for operation in the field
The platform of the K45F modules covers the following varia-
tions:
• Connection of ("mechanical") switches/
safety sensors with contacts:
Safety modules for AS-Interface (ASIsafe modules) are available - K45F 2F-DI: two safety-oriented inputs in operation up to
for field use in degree of protection IP67 (K20F and K45F Category 2 according to EN 954-1. If Category 4 is required,
compact modules) and for the control cabinet (S22.5F SlimLine a two-channel input is available on the module.
modules) in degree of protection IP20. - K45F 2F-DI/2DO: There are also two standard outputs in ad-
dition to the safe inputs. Supplied from the yellow AS-i cable
A very compact module with an optimum price /performance - K45F 2F-DI/2DO Uaux: same as K45F 2F-DI/2DO, but sup-
ratio is thus available for very application. plied from the black 24 V DC cable
- K45F 4F-DI: four safety-oriented inputs in operation up to
Category 2, two for Category 4. Extremely compact double
slave (uses two full AS-i addresses).
6 • Connection of solid-state switches / safety sensors
(non-contact protective devices, BWS):
- K45F LS (light sensor): safe input module for connection of
solid-state safety sensors with testing semiconductor outputs
(OSSD). In particular non-contact protective devices (BWS)
such as active, optoelectronic light arrays and light curtains
for Type 2 and Type 4 according to IEC / EN 61496. Transmit-
ters as well as receivers are supplied with power from the yel-
low AS-i cable. Matching sensor cables and optionally a sep-
arate transmitter supply module are available as accessories.
S22.5F SlimLine safety modules for operation in control
cabinets and local control cabinets
The S22.5F SlimLine safety module has two safety inputs. The
safe connection of signals to ASIsafe networks in the control
cabinet is also possible therefore. For operation up to Category
2, both inputs can be assigned separately; if Category 4 is re-
quired, a two-channel input is available on the module.
In addition there are two S22.5F module versions which have two
standard outputs in addition to the two safety inputs; power is
supplied either from only the yellow AS-Interface cable or as
auxiliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable.

6/12 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety modules

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
K20F compact safety module
I/O type Uaux 24 V
2 F-DI -- 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3

3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3
K45F compact safety module
Modules supplied without mounting plate
I/O type Uaux 24 V
2 F-DI -- 3RK1 205-0BQ00-0AA3
4 F-DI -- 3RK1 205-0CQ00-0AA3
3RK1 205-0BQ00-0AA3
2 F-DI / 2 DO -- 3RK1 405-0BQ20-0AA3
2 F-DI / 2 DO 9 3RK1 405-1BQ20-0AA3
2 F-DI LS type 21) -- 3RK1 205-0BQ21-0AA3
2 F-DI LS type 42) -- 3RK1 205-0BQ24-0AA3
1) Connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7843 (type 2) through socket 1/3
2) Connection of Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7846 (type 4) through socket 1/3,
other makes through socket 2/3.
S22.5F SlimLine safety module
Connection I/O type Uaux 24 V
Screw 2 F-DI -- 3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2
2 F-DI / 2 DO -- 3RK1 405-0BE00-0AA2
2 F-DI / 2 DO 9 3RK1 405-1BE00-0AA2 6
3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2 Spring 2 F-DI -- 3RK1 205-0BG00-0AA2
2 F-DI / 2 DO -- 3RK1 405-0BG00-0AA2
2 F-DI / 2 DO 9 3RK1 405-1BG00-0AA2

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/13

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface safety modules

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
Accessories
K45 mounting plates
For mounting K45F
• For wall mounting 3RK1 901-2EA00
• For standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-2DA00

3RK1 901-2EA00
Connecting cables for K45F LS (light sensor)
For transmitters, 5-pole, both ends with M12 plug
• Straight, plug/box, length 5 m 3RG7848-3EA
• Straight/angled, plug/box, length 5 m 3RG7848-3EB
• Straight, plug/box, length 10 m 3RG7848-3EC
• Straight/angled, plug/box, length 10m 3RG7848-3ED
• Straight, plug/box, length 15 m 3RG7848-3EE
• Straight/angled, plug/box, length 15 m 3RG7848-3EF
For transmitters, 8-pole, both ends with M12 plug
• Straight, plug/box, length 5 m 3RG7848-3CA
• Straight/angled, plug/box, length 5 m 3RG7848-3CB
• Straight, plug/box, length 10 m 3RG7848-3CC
• Straight/angled, plug/box, length 10m 3RG7848-3CD
• Straight, plug/box, length 15 m 3RG7848-3CE

6 • Straight/angled, plug/box, length 15 m

24 V supply modules for
3RG7848-3CF

K45F LS (light sensor)

Optional, for transmitter supply with large protective field widths 3RK1 901-1NP00
Modules supplied without mounting plate
Input bridges for K45F

3RK1 901-1AA00 • Black version 3RK1 901-1AA00

• Red version 3RK1 901-1AA01
AS-Interface sealing caps M12 3RK1 901-1KA00
for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00
AS-Interface sealing caps M12, 3RK1 901-1KA01
tamper-proof
for free M12 sockets
3RK1 901-1KA01

6/14 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 Position Switches

■ Overview ■ Benefits
The 3SF1 position switches with safety-oriented communication The new generation of 3SF1 position switches offers:
can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. • ASIsafe Electronics integrated in the enclosure,
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired with low power consumption < 60 mA
up.
• An extensive range of actuators
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics are inte- • Status display with three LEDs
grated in the switch enclosure.
■ Application
With the standard position switches, mechanical positions of
moved machine parts are converted into electrical signals.
Through their modular and uniform design and large number
of variants, the devices can meet practically all requirements in
industry.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the partic-
ular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be per-
formed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular
purpose. And many different actuator variants are available to
match the mechanical configuration of the moved machined
parts. Dimensions, fixing points and characteristics are largely in
accordance with the EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
The devices are suitable for use in any climate.
Standards
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1 (Low-
Examples of selection options in the modular system Voltage Controlgear, General) and IEC 60947-5-1 (Electrome-
chanical Control Devices).
Modular system
6
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the require-
The position switches of the 3SF1 1.4 and 3SF1 2.4 series are ments of the failsafe principle according to EN 1088.
constructed from a modular system comprising different ver- Approvals
sions of the basic switch and an actuator which must be ordered
separately. Thanks to the modular construction of the switch the AS-Interface according to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
end user can select the right solution for his application from
numerous versions and install it himself in a very short time. With a 3SF1 position switch it is possible to achieve category 2
according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 1 according to
Design IEC 61508.
The 3SF1 switches are available in four different enclosure sizes: Categories 3 or 4 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 2
• Plastic enclosures according to EN 50047, 31 mm wide, or 3 according to IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second
with M12 plug 3SE5 position switch.
• Plastic enclosures, 50 mm wide, with M12 plug and The 3SF1 position switches are approved according to UL 508,
M12 socket UL 50 and UL 746-C.
• Metal enclosures according to EN 50041, 40 mm wide,
with M12 plug
• Metal enclosures, 56 mm wide, with M12 plug and M12 socket
Display
The switches have a status display with three LEDs:
• LED 1 (yellow): F-IN1
• LED 2 (yellow): F-IN2
• LED 3 (green/red):AS-i/FAULT
Connection
Connection to the AS-Interface is connected to the yellow
AS-Interface bus cable by means of a 4-pole M12 connector
socket (plastic version).
The wide enclosures (50 or 56 mm) also have an M12 connector
socket for connecting a second position switch. Category 4
according to EN 954-1 is thus achieved.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/15

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches
Plastic enclosures

■ Selection and ordering data

Modular system
For the ASIsafe version of the position switch, the basic switch
and actuator must be ordered separately.
1 or 2 contacts · 3 LEDs · Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm) · M12 connector socket
Version Contacts LEDs Order No.
Basic switches (with rounded plunger1)) · Enclosure width 31 mm according to EN 50047
With teflon plunger,
with M12 plug, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
• Slow-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 234-1KC05-1BA1
• Snap-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 234-1LC05-1BA1

ASIsafe basic switch

Basic switches (with rounded plunger1)) · Enclosure width 50 mm
With teflon plunger,
with M12 plug, 4-pole,
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
• Slow-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 244-1KC05-1BA2
• Snap-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 244-1LC05-1BA2

6
ASIsafe basic switch
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K, or
positively driven actuator, usable in safety circuits.
1)
On the plastic version the basic switch is a complete unit
with rounded plunger.

6/16 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches
Plastic enclosures

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Diameter Order No.
mm
Operating mechanisms
Roller plunger,
type C according to EN 50047
• Plastic rollers 10 q 3SE5 000-0AD03
Roller plungers
• High-grade steel rollers 10 q 3SE5 000-0AD04
Roller plungers
with central fixing
• Plastic rollers 10 q 3SE5 000-0AD10
• High-grade steel rollers 10 q 3SE5 000-0AD11
With central fixing
Roller levers,
type E according to EN 50047
• Metal lever, plastic roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AE10
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AE11
Roller lever
• High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AE12
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AE13
Angular roller levers
• Metal lever, plastic roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AF10
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q 3SE5 000-0AF11
Angular roller levers • High-grade steel lever, plastic roller
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller
13
13
q

q
3SE5 000-0AF12
3SE5 000-0AF13
6
Part-turn actuators with levers
Part-turn actuator,
plastic (without lever)
switching right or left, q 3SE5 000-0AK00
adjustable
Part-turn actuator
Levers for part-turn actuators
Twist lever,
type A according to EN 50047
• Metal lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA21
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA22
Twist levers
• Metal lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA23
• Metal lever, plastic roller 30 q 3SE5 000-0AA25
• High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA31
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA32
Twist levers,
adjustable length, with grid hole
• Metal lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA60
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA61
• Metal lever, plastic roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA67
Twist lever,
adjustable length • Metal lever, rubber roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA68
• High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA62
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA63

q Positively driven actuator, usable in safety circuits.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/17

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches
Metal enclosures

■ Selection and ordering data

Modular system
For the ASIsafe version of the position switch, the basic switch
and actuator must be ordered separately.
1 or 2 contacts · 3 LEDs · Degree of protection IP66/IP67 · M12 connector socket

Version Contacts LEDs Order No.

Basic switches · Enclosure width 40 mm according to EN 50041
With M12 plug, 4-pole,
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
• Slow-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 114-1KA00-1BA1
• Snap-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 114-1LA00-1BA1

ASIsafe basic switch

Basic switches · Enclosure width 56 mm
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole,
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
• Slow-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 124-1KA00-1BA2
• Snap-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 124-1LA00-1BA2

6 ASIsafe basic switch

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K, or
positively driven actuator, usable in safety circuits.

Version Diameter Order No.

mm
Operating mechanisms
Rounded plungers, type B according to EN 50041
High-grade steel plungers q 3SE5 000-0AC02

Rounded plungers
Roller plungers, type C according to EN 50041
High-grade steel rollers 13 q 3SE5 000-0AD02

Roller plungers
Roller lever
• Metal lever, plastic roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AE01
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AE02

Roller lever • High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AE03

• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22+ q 3SE5 000-0AE04
Angular roller levers
• Metal lever, plastic roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AF01
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AF02

Angular roller levers • High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AF03
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q 3SE5 000-0AF04

q Positively driven actuator, usable in safety circuits.

6/18 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches
Metal enclosures

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Diameter Order No.
mm
Part-turn actuators with levers
Part-turn actuator, metal (without lever)
• Switching right or left, adjustable q 3SE5 000-0AH00
• For fork levers, latching q 3SE5 000-0AT10
Part-turn actuator
Levers for part-turn actuators
Twist levers 27 mm, type A according to EN 50041
• Metal lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA01
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA02

Twist levers • Metal lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA03
• Metal lever, 2 plastic rollers 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA04
• Metal lever, plastic roller 30 q 3SE5 000-0AA05
• Metal lever, plastic roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA07
• Metal levers, rubber roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA08
• High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA11
• High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA12
Twist levers 35 mm
• Metal lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA15
Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 6
• Metal lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA60
• Metal lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA61
• Metal lever, plastic roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA67
• Metal lever, rubber roller 50 q 3SE5 000-0AA68
• High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA62
Twist lever,
adjustable length • High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 000-0AA63
Fork lever (for switches with snap-action contacts only)
• 2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q 3SE5 000-0AT01
• 2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q 3SE5 000-0AT02
Fork lever • 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q 3SE5 000-0AT03
• 2 high-grade steel levers, 19 q 3SE5 000-0AT04
2 high-grade steel rollers
q Positively driven actuator, usable in safety circuits.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/19

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 Position Switches with Separate Actuator

■ Overview ■ Benefits
The 3SF1 position switches with safety-oriented communication The new generation of 3SF1 position switches with separate
can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. actuator offers:
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired • ASIsafe Electronics integrated in the enclosure,
up. with low power consumption < 60 mA
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics are inte- • An extensive range of actuators
grated in the switch enclosure. • Status display with three LEDs

■ Application
Position switches with separate actuator are used where the po-
sition of doors, covers or protective grills must be monitored for
safety reasons.
The position switch can only be operated with the matching
coded actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices
is impossible.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the partic-
ular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be per-
formed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular
purpose. Dimensions, fixing points of the enclosure are in accor-
dance with EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
The devices are suitable for use in any climate.
Standards
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1 (Low-
3SF1 position switches with separate actuator and Voltage Controlgear, General) and IEC 60947-5-1 (Electrome-
with integrated ASIsafe electronics
chanical Control Devices).

6 3SF1 position switches with separate actuator have the same

enclosures as the standard switches.
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the require-
ments of the failsafe principle according to EN 1088.
Operation Approvals
The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actua- AS-Interface according to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
tion from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 x 90°. The
switches can also be approached from above. With a 3SF1 position switch it is possible to achieve category 3
according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 2 according to
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the po- IEC 61508.
sition switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of six
versions to suit the application. Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 3
according to IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second
The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary 3SE5 position switch.
devices is impossible.
The 3SF1 position switches are approved according to UL 508,
A high-grade steel blocking device for attaching up to eight pad- UL 50 and UL 746-C.
locks is available for even more safety.
A rubber cap to protect the metal enclosure from contamination
is available for operation in dusty environments.
Display
The switches have a status display with three LEDs:
• LED 1 (yellow): F-IN1
• LED 2 (yellow): F-IN2
• LED 3 (green/red):AS-i/FAULT
Connection
Connection to the AS-Interface is by means of a 4-pole M12
connector socket (plastic version) connected to the yellow AS-
Interface bus cable.
The wide enclosures (50 or 56 mm) also have an M12 connector
socket for connecting a second position switch. Category 4
according to EN 954-1 is thus achieved.

6/20 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches with separate actuator
Plastic enclosures

■ Overview
• Contacts: 1 or 2 slow-action contacts
• Status display with 3 LEDs 24 V DC;
1: F–IN1, 2: F–IN2, 3: AS-i/FAULT
• Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm)

■ Selection and ordering data

Version1) Contacts Order No.
Enclosure width 31 mm according to EN 50047
5 directions of approach
M12 connector socket, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
Slow-action contacts 2 NC q 3SF1 234-1QV40-1BA1

ASIsafe
Enclosure width 50 mm
5 directions of approach
M12 connector socket, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
Slow-action contacts 1 NC q 3SF1 244-1QV40-1BA2

6
ASIsafe
Actuators
Actuators
Standard actuator, 3SE5 000-0AV01
length 75.6 mm

With vertical fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV02

length 53 mm

With transverse fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV03

length 47 mm

Radius actuator, left, 3SE5 000-0AV04

length 44.5 mm

Radius actuator, right, 3SE5 000-0AV06

length 44.5 mm

Universal actuators, 3SE5 000-0AV05

length 69 mm

Optional accessories
Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head, 3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3
for up to 8 padlocks

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.

1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/21

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches with separate actuator
Metal enclosures

■ Overview
• Contacts: 1 or 2 slow-action contacts
• Status display with 3 LEDs 24 V DC;
1: F–IN1, 2: F–IN2, 3: AS-i/FAULT
• Degree of protection IP66/IP67

■ Selection and ordering data

Version1) Contacts Order No.
Enclosure width 40 mm according to EN 50041
5 directions of approach
M12 connector socket, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
Slow-action contacts 2 NC q 3SF1 114-1QV10-1BA1

ASIsafe
Enclosure width 56 mm
5 directions of approach
M12 connector socket, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
Slow-action contacts 1 NC q 3SF1 124-1QV10-1BA2

6
ASIsafe
Actuators
Actuators
Standard actuator, 3SE5 000-0AV01
length 75.6 mm

With vertical fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV02

length 53 mm

With transverse fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV03

length 47 mm

Radius actuator, left, 3SE5 000-0AV04

length 44.5 mm

Radius actuator, right, 3SE5 000-0AV06

length 44.5 mm

Universal actuators, 3SE5 000-0AV05

length 69 mm

Optional accessories
Protective caps made of black rubber for the actuator head, SE5 000-0AV08-1AA2
to protect the actuator openings from contamination

Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head, 3SE5 000-0AV08-1AA3

for up to 8 padlocks

1)
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.

6/22 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 Position Switches with Tumbler

■ Overview ■ Benefits
The 3SF1 position switches with safety-oriented communication The new generation of 3SF1 3 position switches with tumbler
can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. offers:
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired • More safety through higher locking forces:
up. - 1300 N for the plastic version
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics are inte- - 2600 N for the metal version
grated in the switch enclosure. • Various release mechanisms;
lock release, escape release and emergency release
• ASIsafe Electronics integrated in the enclosure;
connected through 4-pole M12 plug
• Current consumption of the magnet max. 170 mA
• Two contact blocks as standard equipment,
hence fewer versions needed
• Same dimensions for all enclosure variants;
plastic, metal
• An extensive range of actuators
• Status display with four LEDs

■ Application
The position switches with tumbler are exceptional, technically
safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or inten-
tional opening of protective doors, protective grills or other
covers as long as a dangerous situation is present (i.e. follow-on
motion of the shutdown machine).
3SF1 position switches with tumbler and
with integrated ASIsafe electronics The safety position switches with tumbler have the following
functions:
Operation • Enabling the machine or process with closed and locked
protective device
6
The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actua-
tion from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 x 90°. The • Locking the machine or process with opened protective
switches can also be approached from above. device
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the • Position monitoring of the protective device and tumbler
position switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of Standards
six versions to suit the application.
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1 (Low-
The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary Voltage Controlgear, General) and IEC 60947-5-1 (Electrome-
devices is impossible. chanical Control Devices).
A high-grade steel blocking device for attaching up to eight The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the require-
padlocks is available for even more safety. ments of the failsafe principle according to EN 1088.
A rubber cap to protect the enclosure from contamination is Approvals
available for operation in dusty environments.
AS-Interface according to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
Tumbler
The switches are approved for use with locking devices accord-
There are two versions for locking the actuator: ing to EN 1088 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2.
• Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) with various
release mechanisms 3SE5 3 position switches with tumbler bear the VDE test mark for
tested according to GS-ET19 (Test Principles of the German
• Magnet field lock (open-circuit principle) Trade Association for Locking Devices with Electromagnetic
Display Tumblers).

The switches have a status display with four LEDs: With a 3SF1 3 position switch it is possible to achieve category
3 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 2 according to
• LED 1 (yellow): F-IN1 IEC 61508.
• LED 2 (yellow): F-IN2 Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) or SIL 3 ac-
• LED 3 (green): AS-i cording to IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second 3SE5
• LED 4 (red): FAULT position switch.

Connection The 3SF1 position switches are approved according to UL 508,

UL 50 and UL 746-C.
Connection to the AS-Interface is by means of a 4-pole M12
connector socket (plastic version) connected to the yellow AS-
Interface bus cable (no additional supply of auxiliary power is
required thanks to the low current consumption of the magnet of
max. 170 mA).

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/23

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches with tumbler
Plastic enclosures

■ Overview
5 directions of approach · Degree of protection IP66/IP67
• Contacts, slow-action contacts: • Magnet: Rated operational voltage 24 V DC
- Version -1BA1: • Locking force 1300 N (1000 N according to GS-ET 19)
ASIsafe channel 1 on 1 NC contact from the actuator and
channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the magnet • Status display with 4 LEDs 24 V DC;
- Version -1BA3: 1: F–IN1, 2: F–IN2, 3: AS-i, 4: FAULT
ASIsafe channel 1 on 1 NC contact from the actuator and
channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the actuator

■ Selection and ordering data

Tumbler1) Contacts Order No.
Actuator / magnet
1300 N locking force · Enclosure width 54 mm
Spring-actuated locks
• With auxiliary release 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SD21-1BA1
• With auxiliary release 2 NC / – q 3SF1 324-1SD21-1BA3
• With auxiliary release with lock 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SE21-1BA1

3SF1 324-1SD21-...
• With escape release from the front 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SF21-1BA1
• With escape release from the back 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SG21-1BA1
and auxiliary release from the front
• With emergency release from the back 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SJ21-1BA1
6 and auxiliary release from the front

3SF1 324-1SF21-...
Magnetic field lock 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 324-1SB21-1BA1
2 NC / – q 3SF1 324-1SB21-1BA3

3SF1 324-1SB21-...
Actuators
Actuators
Standard actuator, 3SE5 000-0AV01
length 75.6 mm

With vertical fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV02

length 53 mm

With transverse fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV03

length 47 mm

Radius actuator, left, 3SE5 000-0AV04

length 44.5 mm

Radius actuator, right, 3SE5 000-0AV06

length 44.5 mm

Universal actuators, 3SE5 000-0AV05

length 69 mm

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. Optional accessories, see page 6/22.
1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.

6/24 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 position switches with tumbler
Metal enclosures

■ Overview
5 directions of approach · Degree of protection IP66/IP67
• Contacts, slow-action contacts: • Magnet: Rated operational voltage 24 V DC
ASIsafe channel 1 on 1 NC contact from the actuator and • Locking force 2600 N (2000 N according to GS-ET 19)
channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the magnet
• Status display with 4 LEDs 24 V DC;
1: F–IN1, 2: F–IN2, 3: AS-i, 4: FAULT

■ Selection and ordering data

Tumbler1) Contacts Order No.
Actuator / magnet
2600 N locking force · Enclosure width 54 mm
Spring-actuated locks
• With auxiliary release 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 314-1SD11-1BA1
• With auxiliary release with lock 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 314-1SE11-1BA1
• With escape release from the front 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 314-1SF11-1BA1
• With escape release from the back 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 314-1SG11-1BA1
and auxiliary release from the front
3SF1 314-1SD21-...
• With emergency release from the back 1 NC / 1 NC q 3SF1 314-1SJ11-1BA1
and auxiliary release from the front

3SF1 314-1SF21-...
Magnetic field lock 1 NC / 1 NC 3SF1 314-1SB11-1BA1
6
q

3SF1 314-1BF21-...
Actuators
Actuators
Standard actuator, 3SE5 000-0AV01
length 75.6 mm

With vertical fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV02

length 53 mm

With transverse fixing, 3SE5 000-0AV03

length 47 mm

Radius actuator, left, 3SE5 000-0AV04

length 44.5 mm

Radius actuator, right, 3SE5 000-0AV06

length 44.5 mm

Universal actuators, 3SE5 000-0AV05

length 69 mm

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. Optional accessories, see page 6/22.
1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/25

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 hinge switches
Plastic enclosures

■ Overview
The 3SF1 hinge switches with safety-oriented communication For the ASIsafe version of the hinge switch, the basic switch and
can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. actuator head must be ordered separately. The basic switches
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired correspond to the position switches of the standard version (only
up. use versions with snap-action contacts).
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics are The standards and approvals are the same as for the 3SF1
integrated in the switch enclosure. position switches (see page 6/15).
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges.
There are two actuator variants here:
• Hollow shaft, diameter inside 8 mm, outside 12 mm
• Solid shaft, diameter 10 mm

■ Selection and ordering data

Modular system
1 or 2 contacts · 3 LEDs · Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm) · M12 connector socket

Version Contacts LEDs Order No.

Basic switches · Enclosure width 31 mm according to EN 50047
With teflon plunger,
with M12 plug, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
Snap-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 234-1LC05-1BA1

6 ASIsafe basic switch

Basic switches · Enclosure width 50 mm
With teflon plunger,
with M12 plug, 4-pole;
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
Snap-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 244-1LC05-1BA2

ASIsafe basic switch

Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
• Operating angle 10° 3SE5 000-0AU21

Actuator head with

hollow shaft
With solid shaft
• Operating angle 10° 3SE5 000-0AU22

Actuator head with

solid shaft
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.

6/26 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF1 hinge switches
Metal enclosures

■ Overview
The 3SF1 hinge switches with safety-oriented communication For the ASIsafe version of the hinge switch, the basic switch and
can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. actuator head must be ordered separately. The basic switches
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired correspond to the position switches of the standard version (only
up. use versions with snap-action contacts).
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics are The standards and approvals are the same as for the 3SF1
integrated in the switch enclosure. position switches (see page 6/15).
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges.
There are two actuator variants here:
• Hollow shaft, diameter inside 8 mm, outside 12 mm
• Solid shaft, diameter 10 mm

■ Selection and ordering data

Modular system
1 or 2 contacts · 3 LEDs · Degree of protection IP66/IP67 · M12 connector socket

Version Contacts LEDs Order No.

Basic switches · Enclosure width 40 mm according to EN 50041
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole
Channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
Snap-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 114-1LA00-1BA1

ASIsafe basic switch 6

Basic switches · Enclosure width 56 mm
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole
Channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
Snap-action contacts 1 NC 24 V DC q 3SF1 124-1LA00-1BA2

ASIsafe basic switch

Actuator heads
Hollow shaft
• Operating angle 10° 3SE5 000-0AU21

Actuator head with

hollow shaft
Solid shaft
• Operating angle 10° 3SE5 000-0AU22

Actuator head with

solid shaft

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/27

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
AS-Interface F adapters
for EMERGENCY STOP control devices

■ Overview
The AS-Interface F adapter is used to connect an EMERGENCY
STOP control device according to ISO 13850 from the 3SB3
series to the AS-Interface bus system. The F adapter is suitable
for control devices with mounting on front plates.
The F adapter has a safe AS-Interface 2E slave and is snapped
from behind onto the EMERGENCY STOP control device (actua-
tor). In the 2E/1A expanded version, an output is also available
for actuating an indicator light with LED.
Connection to the AS-Interface bus cable is made with screw
terminal or spring-loaded terminals depending on the version.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connection or
the integrated addressing socket.
Safety category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved with the adapter.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Connection Order No.
AS-Interface F adapters
for 3SB3 EMERGENCY STOP actuator
For mounting on front plate
• 2E Screw terminals 3SF5 402-1AA03
• 2E/1A, with output for LED control 3SF5 402-1AB03

6 • 2E
• 2E/1A, with output for LED control
Spring-loaded terminals 3SF5 402-1AA04
3SF5 402-1AB04
3SF5 402-1AA03

3SF5 402-1AA04

6/28 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons for AS-Interface

■ Overview
EMERGENCY STOP control devices can now be directly con- The enclosure is delivered fully equipped and wired up.
nected via the standard AS-Interface with safety-oriented com- It contains:
munication. This applies only for EMERGENCY STOP devices of • SIRIUS 3SB3 EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbuttons
the SIRIUS 3SB3 series for front plate mounting and for installa- with positive latching according to ISO 13850 and
tion in an enclosure. rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP enclosures • Contact blocks with two NC contacts
• F slave with 2 safe inputs
• Identification plate
The plastic enclosures come with a plastic EMERGENCY STOP
pushbutton, the metal enclosures with a metal EMERGENCY
STOP pushbutton.
The plastic versions of the enclosures are fitted with a terminal
for the AS-Interface shaped cable (the cable is contacted by the
insulation piercing method and routed past the enclosure on the
outside). For the metal enclosures, the AS-Interface shaped
cable (or round cable) is routed into the enclosure.
The metal enclosures are also available with an M12 plug.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version
AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP enclosures,
Connection Order No.
6
plastic enclosures
• Yellow top part of enclosure Insulation piercing method 3SF5 811-0AA08
• Yellow top part of enclosure with protective collar Insulation piercing method 3SF5 811-0AB08
• Yellow top part of enclosure M12 plugs 3SF5 811-0AA10

5SF5 811-0AA08
AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP enclosures,
metal enclosures
• Yellow top part of enclosure Cable gland 3SF5 811-2AA08
• Yellow top part of enclosure with protective collar Cable gland 3SF5 811-2AB08
• Yellow top part of enclosure M12 plugs 3SF5 811-2AA10
• Yellow top part of enclosure with protective collar M12 plugs 3SF5 811-2AB10
3SF5 811-2AB08

3SF5 811-2AA10

AS-Interface F adapter to connect EMERGENCY STOP push-

buttons in individual mounting on front panels, see page 6/28.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/29

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
3SF2 AS-Interface cable-operated switches

■ Overview ■ Application
SIRIUS cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for
EMERGENCY STOP devices on particularly endangered system
sections.
As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is only limited
by the length of the pull-rope, large systems can also be pro-
tected.
Standards
The switches with positive latching are suitable for operation
in EMERGENCY STOP devices in according to EN ISO 13850.
They are usable up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1.

AS-Interface cable-operated switches can now be directly

connected via the standard AS-Interface with safety-oriented
communication.
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired
up.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Basic switches Contacts Order No.
6 Cable-operated switches with AS-i F adapter
Metal enclosure with dust protection,
IP65,
latching according to EN ISO 13850,
with button reset
• For rope lengths up to 10 m, 3SE7 120-1BF00 2 NC q 3SF2 120-1BF00-0BA1
with alignment window

• For rope lengths up to 25 m, 3SE7 150-1BF00 2 NC q 3SF2 150-1BF00-0BA1

with alignment window

• For rope lengths up to 50 m 3SE7 140-1BF00 2 NC q 3SF2 140-1BF00-0BA1

6/30 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS400 light curtains

■ Overview ■ Benefits
Integrated functions:
• Start/restart inhibit
• Contactor control
• Blanking function package with
- Fixed blanking
- Floating blanking
- Reduced resolution
• Muting" function package
• Multi-scan function
• Cycle control
Configuration:
• By means of teach-in key using optomagnetic key
• Transmission of configuration data through a plug-in configu-
ration card
• 2 transmission channels
• Cascading of host and guest devices
3RG78 4 and 3SF78 4 light curtains and light grids • Expanded display (2 × 7 segments)
(for AS-Interface and PROFIBUS)
• are active optoelectronic protective devices (AOPD), Outputs/connections:
• comply with type 2 or 4 acc. to EN 61496-1, -2, • Local interface
• comply with SIL 2 and 3 acc. to IEC/EN 61508, • M12 connection
• are EU prototype tested, • Transistor outputs
• protect the operating personnel at or near dangerous • Connection to AS-Interface
machines,
• operate contact-free, ■ Application 6
• are free of wear in comparison with mechanical systems Light curtains for finger and hand protection
(e.g. safety mats). in hazardous areas
For further details, please refer to the "Safety Integrated" manual Protection from entering hazardous areas by mounting light
and the operating instructions for the respective devices. curtains near dangerous machine parts (finger and hand protec-
tion)
Tests/service
The devices are EU prototype tested (German Technical Inspec-
torate (TÜV) Product Service in cooperation with the German
Statutory Industrial Accident Insurance Institution (BIA)).
Where necessary, tests can be performed before initial start-up
as well as during the annual inspection (e.g. as per regulatory
requirements for presses). Please contact your Siemens repre-
sentative.

Device selection
Light curtains for category 2 or 4, with 14, 20, 30 and 40 mm
resolution
Application areas
E.g. presses, punches, filter presses, cutting machines

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/31

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS400 light curtains

■ Application (continued)
Light curtains to secure horizontal hazardous areas Light grids for securing access points
near the floor
Reliable detection of persons when they enter hazardous areas
Reliable detection of persons in hazardous areas by mounting
the light curtain near the floor (not possible to crawl under)

Device selection

Device selection 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids for category 4,

with 18 m range
Light curtains for category 2 or 4, with 50 and 55 mm resolution
Application areas
Application areas
6
Securing access points, e.g. to robots or handling machines.
E.g. welding and assembly lines and robots in the automotive
industry Light grids to protect access to large areas

Light curtains to secure horizontal hazardous areas Reliable detection of persons when they enter hazardous areas

Reliable detection of persons in hazardous areas by mounting

the light curtain at heights of 0.6 to 1 m

Securing larger hazardous areas with high ranges of 60 m

and 70 m.

Device selection Device selection

Light curtains for category 2 or 4, with 80 and 90 mm resolution 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids for category 4,
with 60 m and 70 m ranges.
Application areas
Application areas
E.g. welding and assembly lines and robots in the automotive
industry Securing access points, e.g. to automatic processing centers
or palleting machines.
Safety categories
Depending on the safety category requirement to EN 954-1
that results from the C standard and/or the machine or system
risk analysis, light curtains or grids up to type 2 or 4 can be used
(definition of the safety categories: See page "Requirements for
categories according to EN 954-1" in Catalog FS 10, Section 3).

6/32 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS400 light curtains

■ Design ■ Function
A light curtain or light grid comprises an emitter and a receiver, Blanking function package
which must be mounted opposite each other. Depending on the
resolution and the length, a certain number of transmit and re- The light curtains can also be supplied with an optional blanking
ceive diodes are arranged on top of each other. The infrared function.
LEDs of the emitter emit short light pulses that are detected by Fixed blanking
the receive diodes.
If an object is permanently located in the light path, the corre-
• 3SF78 44 light curtains and grids with integrated evaluation for sponding zone can be suppressed. This is achieved by sup-
Type 4 according to IEC/EN 61496 pressing the required number of beams.
- Resolution 14, 30, 50 and 90 mm
- Protective field height: 150 mm to 3000 mm The suppressed objects must be permanently located in the
- 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids protective zone, otherwise safety cannot be guaranteed. The
- Transceiver, 2-beam with deflection mirror light curtain switches the equipment off.
- Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective
field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an Configuration is carried out using a teach-in function by means
option) of the safety key or using the programming and diagnostics soft-
ware SafetyLab.
• 3RG78 43 light curtains with integrated evaluation for Type 2
according to IEC/EN 61496, developed according to
EN 61508 (SIL 2), suited for risk assessment according to pr NSC0_00632
EN ISO 13849
- Resolution 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm
- Protective field heights from 150 mm to 1800 mm
• 3RG78 46 light curtains with integrated evaluation for Type 4
to IEC/EN 61496
- Resolution 14, 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm
- Protective field heights from 150 mm to 1800 mm
• 3RG78 42 ASIsafe light curtains and grids
with external evaluation for Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496
- Resolution 14, 30, 50 and 90 mm
- Protective field heights from 150 mm to 3000 mm
- Transceiver, 2-beam with reflective mirror 6
- 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids
- Connection to actuator sensor interface Active beams
Permanently suppressed beams
- Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective
field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an
option)
Floating blanking
Standards
• IEC/EN 61496-1, -2 (requirements for non-contact protection If moving objects are located in the light path, any number of
systems) beams can be suppressed. The objects can move within the
suppressed beams without the light curtain switching off.
• EN 999 (including calculation of safety clearances)
• EN 954-1 (machine safety, safety-related parts of control If the moving objects are removed from the zone, the light curtain
systems) will interrupt the hazardous movement, otherwise safety can no
longer be guaranteed.
• EN 61508 (functional safety of electrical/electronic/program-
mable electronic safety-related systems) Configuration is carried out using a teach-in function by means
of the safety key or using the programming and diagnostics soft-
ware SafetyLab.

NSC0_00633

Active beams
Permanently suppressed beams
Temporarily suppressed beams

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/33

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS400 light curtains

■ Function (continued)
Reduced resolution 4-sensor sequential muting
If an object is located in the light path, two or three beams can If the material that is to be transported in the danger zone always
be suppressed. The difference between reduced resolution and has the same dimensions and there is no lack of space, the use
floating blanking is that continuous monitoring does not take of sequential muting is preferred. With sequential muting, four
place. muting sensors are connected. These must be activated in a
predefined sequence to trigger muting. They can be activated in
A DIP switch is used for configuration or the programming and either of the following sequences: M1, M2, M3, M4 or M4, M3,
diagnostics software SafetyLab. M2, M1. The transported goods must be of sufficient length to
briefly activate all 4 sensors simultaneously. Sequential muting is
successfully completed when the third muting sensor to be acti-
NSC0_00634a vated is not activated any longer.
The SafetyLab software can be used to select a muting variant
in which the second muting sequence is triggered before the
first has finished (sequential muting with two objects). This
variant saves time and, in turn, production costs for the user.

Start

M1 M2 M3 M4
Danger Zone
E E E E
E
Area with reduced resolution

S
S S S S
"Muting" function package
6 When arranged vertically, light curtains, light grids, and trans-
ceivers are often used for protecting access points. With addi-
tional sensor signals, the protective function can be suppressed
to allow material to be transported in or out of hazardous areas,
for example. The protective field is temporarily suppressed and,
once the goods have passed through, reactivated. Personnel
must not be allowed to enter the hazardous area while muting is 2-sensor parallel muting
active.
Parallel muting is ideal in plants in which the dimensions of the
Using the number of connected sensors or the sequence of goods are not constant or space requirements must be kept to a
the muting signals, the devices automatically recognize the minimum. Two muting sensors can be used, whose beams inter-
"sequential muting" mode when inputs M1 to M4 are assigned sect behind the protective field in the danger zone.
and "2-sensor parallel muting" when the signals M2 and M3 are
assigned. A DIP switch can be used to set "4-sensor parallel Parallel muting is used when signals M2 and M3 are switched
muting". simultaneously without M1 and M4 having been activated or
connected beforehand or simultaneously. Two-sensor parallel
Muting restart muting is straightforward because only two muting sensors are
If the power fails while goods are passing the muting sensors, for required. Goods can also be moved forward and backward
example, the valid muting sequence is interrupted. When the within the muting area.
power supply has been restored, muting is not automatically
resumed because the muting sequence is not as expected.
Start
To remove the goods from the area covered by the muting
sensors, an integrated retraction mode can be activated using M2
the start key. The light curtain attempts to find a valid muting
sequence from the muting sensors. If successful, the muting
E
indicator lamp stops flashing and is lit continuously. If unsuc-
cessful, the start key must be kept depressed until the muting
path is completely free.
Danger Zone

M3

6/34 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS400 light curtains

■ Function (continued)
3-sensor direction muting Transceiver
Three-sensor direction muting is configured in a similar way to The transceiver comprises a transmitter and receiver in a single
2-sensor parallel muting. Material can only be transported unit. The infrared light of the transmit diode is reflected twice
through the light curtain in one direction. To trigger the muting through 90° so that it returns to the receive diode of the trans-
function, muting sensor M1 must first be activated, followed ceiver. This creates a twin-beam light barrier that is more cost ef-
by muting sensors M2 and M3. If the paths for muting sensors fective than conventional light barriers with separate transmitters
M2 and M3 are interrupted, sensor M1 does not need to be and receivers. 3RG78 45 series transceivers have integrated
activated. contactor control and startup/restart inhibit. 3RG78 44 and
3SF78 44 series transceivers have additional integrated muting
functions. These devices include five 5-pin M12 sockets on the
front panel, to which the muting sensors can be directly con-
Start nected.
Cascading of devices: Host/guest combinations
M1 M2
Cascading of devices refers to lengthening the optical axis and
E E
therefore the protective zone height, whereby protection on the
horizontal and vertical levels can be realized at the same time
using a flexible connecting cable between the host and guest
Danger zone device. The safety outputs and the processor tasks are located
in the host device so that the guest devices can be connected
regardless of the function package or outputs.
S
S The standard cable that can be used to connect the host to the
M3
guest is already installed on the guest device. The host comes
with the appropriate M12 socket on its underside. Host devices
can only be operated together with a guest device.
The guest devices are from the 3RG78 42 series, but they
are also suitable for the 3SF78 42, 3RG78 44, 3SF78 44 and

6
Parallel muting with 4 sensors 3RG78 45 series. The guest device resolution can be combined
with any other resolution (e.g. the host device can have a 14 mm
4-sensor parallel muting can be used advantageously wherever resolution while a 30 or 50 mm resolution is sufficient for the
• the transported material is too small to be acquired simulta- guest device.
neously by 4 sensors arranged sequentially,
PC software
• the available space is too small even for the crossover light
beams of 2-sensor parallel muting. PC software can be used to visualize and record the function of
the light curtains.
The function of 4-sensor parallel muting corresponds to that of
2-sensor parallel muting with the additional characteristic of the SafetyLab is the diagnostic and parameterization software for
muting activation signal being obtained from two sensor pairs. 3RG78 44 / 3SF78 44 light curtains, light grids and transceivers.
Muting is triggered when within a 2.5 s interval, M2 is activated SafetyLab can be used for all available light curtain and light
with M3 or M1 is activated with M4. grid function packages as of firmware Version 3.10:
• Blanking function package
• Muting function package
Start • Sequence control function package
The firmware version of the receiver is indicated on the
M2 M1 7-segment display during start-up.
E Mounting sets
To facilitate installation, alignment, commissioning and trouble-
shooting, a practical accessories package containing mounting
Danger zone
columns, reflecting mirror columns, reflecting mirrors, mounting
supports and laser alignment tools is available.
S

M3 M4

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/35

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Overview
3SF78 44 light curtains and light grids for ASIsafe
with integrated processing unit for type 4 in accordance
with IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• With function packages "Blanking", "Muting", and
"Cycle Control"
• Resolutions: 14, 30, and 50 mm
• Protective zone height: 150 mm to 3000 mm
• 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids
• Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective
zone heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement
(optional).
Two standard 3RG78 48-0AB mounting brackets each are
enclosed with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories,
"Standard retaining angle set (1 set = 2 pieces, incl. screws) see
page 6/50.

3SF78 44 (ASIsafe) program overview

Unit type Function Output Connection For light curtains: LED indicator see page
package type Resolution light
For light grids and
transceivers: Range
14 mm 30 mm
Light curtains Blanking ASIsafe ASIsafe ✔ ✔ − “Light curtains mit Function package
Blanking ASIsafe” see page 6/39

6 Light curtains Muting ASIsafe ASIsafe − ✔ − “Light curtains mit Function package
Muting ASIsafe” see page 6/39
Light curtains Muting ASIsafe ASIsafe − ✔ with “Light curtains mit Function package
Muting ASIsafe und integriertem
LED-Leuchtmelder” see page 6/40
Light grids Muting ASIsafe ASIsafe 0.8 m ... 18 m; − “Light grids mit Function package
6 ... 70 m Muting ASIsafe” see page 6/40
Light grids Muting ASIsafe ASIsafe 0.8 m ... 18 m with “Light grids mit Function package
Muting ASIsafe und integriertem
LED-Leuchtmelder” see page 6/40
Transceiver Muting ASIsafe ASIsafe 6.5 m with and “Transceiver mit Function package
without Muting ASIsafe” see page 6/41
Light curtains Sequence ASIsafe ASIsafe ✔ ✔ − “Light curtains mit Function package
control system Sequence control system ASIsafe”
see page 6/41
Accessories
Electrical connection
• Connecting cable with M12 connector, also applicable for supplying power to the ASIsafe emitter “Connection cable to connect to ASI-
safe with a straight connector and
straight/angular M12 socket for the
3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46 emitter
light curtains” see page 6/62
• ASIsafe modules “ASIsafe” see page 6/60
Accessory cable
• for the local connection to connect muting lights, key-operated switches, reset buttons, etc. “Cable and cable boxes for the
3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 series” see
page 6/61
Assembly materials
• Fixing columns, reflecting mirror “Fixing columns” see page 6/57
• Muting mounting systems “Assembly materials” see page 6/59
• Muting accessories “Muting lamp and accessories”
see page 6/61
Laser alignment assistance, diagnostic software “Laser alignment aids”
see page 6/59

Other ASIsafe light curtains and light grids for external processing unit
are available in Catalog FS 10 and in the A&D Mall under:
http//www.siemens.com/automation/mall

6/36 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Technical specifications
Type 3SF78 44 Signal inputs and outputs (local socket, optional)
Safety category to EN, Type 4 Signal inputs
IEC 61496-1, -2
• Restart inhibit unlocking 1 button with 1 NO contact
Protective field height (floating)
• for 14 and 30 mm resolution 150 ... 1800 mm - min. switching time 300 ms
• for 50 mm resolution 450 ... 3000 mm - max. switching time 4 sec
Protective field width, range • Teach-in 2-pole key-operated switch
(selector switch) (floating)
• for 14 mm resolution 0 ... 6 m
- -simultaneity < 500 ms
• for 30 and 50 mm resolution 0 ... 18 m
Voltage output (for command 24 V DC ± 20 %, max 0.5 A
Detection capability (resolution) 14 mm, 30 mm, 50 mm devices or safety sensors only)
Supply voltage 24 V DC ± 20 %
(emitter and receiver) (external power pack with safe
isolation and compensation of Receiver/transceiver machine interface, ASIsafe
20 ms voltage dip is necessary)
OSSDs safety 4 bit AS-i data
Residual ripple < 5% switching outputs
Minimum Typical Maximum
Current consumption
Permissible cable length - - 100 m
• Emitter 75 mA
Restart time after beam interruption - 140 ms -
• Receiver 160 mA (without external load)
Slave address area 1 - 31
General value for external fuse 4A
in the transmitter and receiver Slave address area (WE) 0 (ex works
supply leads ID code/IO code emitter -
Wave length 880 nm (infrared) ID code receiver B
Synchronization Optically between emitter and IO code receiver 0
receiver
Ambient temperature
AS-i profile
Cycle time according to
Secure slave
5 ms
6
• Operation 0 ... +50 °C AS-i specification
• Storage –25 ... +70 °C OSSD response time Beam number dependent,
Relative humidity 15 ... 95% see operating instructions

Degree of protection IP65 Additional AS-i system 40 ms

response time
Safety class to DIN VDE 0106 III
Vibration resistance 5 g, 10 ... 55 Hz to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 10 g, 16 ms in accordance with
IEC/EN 60068-2-29

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/37

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Ordering notes
Included in the scope of supply
3SF78 44 light curtains with Function package 3SF78 44 light grids/transceiver
Blanking/Sequence control system: with Muting function package:
Transmitter: Transmitter:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB • Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Transmitter insert • Transmitter insert
Receiver: Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB • Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Operating instructions/data sheets • Operating instructions/data sheets
• Safety key Guest devices of the 3RG78 42 series
• Additionally for 14 mm resolution: Transmitter:
3RG78 48-0FH test rods (14/24/33 and 19/29 mm)
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Additionally for 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH/BH test rods (14/30 and 38 mm) Receiver:
Guest devices of the 3RG78 42 series • Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
Transmitter: • Additionally for 14 mm and 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH test rod
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Additionally for 14 mm and 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH test rod
3SF78 44 light curtains with Muting function package:
6 Transmitter:
• 3RG78 48-0AB mounting bracket set
• Transmitter insert
Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Operating instructions/data sheets
• Safety key
• Additionally for 14 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0FH test rods (14/24/33 and 19/29 mm)
• Additionally for 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH/BH test rods (14/30 and 38 mm)
Guest devices of the 3RG78 42 series
Transmitter:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Additionally for 14 mm and 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH test rod

6/38 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains with Function package Blanking ASIsafe 1)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Standard device
14 mm resolution 30 mm resolution
mm Order No. Order No.
Resolution 14 mm und 30 mm
300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB04-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD04-0SS1
300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB04-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD04-0SS0
450 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB06-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD06-0SS1
450 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB06-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD06-0SS0
600 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB08-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD08-0SS1
600 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB08-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD08-0SS0
750 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB11-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD11-0SS1
750 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB11-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD11-0SS0
900 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB13-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB13-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD13-0SS0
1050 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB15-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD15-0SS1
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB15-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD15-0SS0
1200 Receiver 3SF78 44-6BB17-0SS1 3SF78 44-6BD17-0SS1
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB17-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD17-0SS0
1350 Receiver on request 3SF78 44-6BD20-0SS1
1350 Transmitter on request 3SF78 44-6SD20-0SS0
1500 Receiver on request 3SF78 44-6BD22-0SS1
1500
1650
Transmitter
Receiver
on request
on request
3SF78 44-6SD22-0SS0
3SF78 44-6BD24-0SS1
6
1650 Transmitter on request 3SF78 44-6SD24-0SS0
1800 Receiver on request 3SF78 44-6BD26-0SS1
1800 Transmitter on request 3SF78 44-6SD26-0SS0

Light curtains with Function package Muting ASIsafe 1)

Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 30 mm
300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD04-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DD21
300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD04-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DD20
450 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD06-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DE21
450 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD06-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DE20
600 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD08-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DF21
600 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD08-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DF20
750 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD11-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD11-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD13-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD13-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD15-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD15-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD17-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DK21
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD17-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DK20
1350 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD20-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DL21
1350 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD20-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DL20
1500 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD22-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DM21
1500 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD22-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DM20
1650 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD24-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DN21
1650 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD24-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DN20
1800 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD26-0SS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DP21
1800 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD26-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DP20
1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/38

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/39

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Light curtains with Muting ASIsafe Function package and integrated LED 1)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 30 mm
300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD04-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DD21
300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD04-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DD20
450 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD06-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DE21
450 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD06-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DE20
600 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD08-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DF21
600 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD08-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DF20
750 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD11-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD11-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD13-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD13-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD15-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD15-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MD17-0KS1 on request 3RG78 42-6DK21
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SD17-0SS0 on request 3RG78 42-6DK20

Light grids with Function package Muting ASIsafe 1)

No. of beams Beam distance Type Standard device

6 Range 0.8 ... 18 m

mm Order No.

4 beam 300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MM50-0SS1

4 beam 300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SM50-0SS0
3 beam 400 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MP50-0SS1
3 beam 400 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SP50-0SS0
2 beam 500 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MS50-0SS1
2 beam 500 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SS50-0SS0
Range 6 ... 70 m
4 beam 300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MM51-0SS1
4 beam 300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SM51-0SS0
3 beam 400 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MP51-0SS1
3 beam 400 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SP51-0SS0
2 beam 500 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MS51-0SS1
2 beam 500 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SS51-0SS0

Light grids with Muting ASIsafe Function package and integrated LED 1)
No. of beams Beam distance Type Standard device
mm Order No.
Range 0.8 ... 18 m
4 beam 300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MM50-0KS1
4 beam 300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SM50-0SS0
3 beam 400 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MP50-0KS1
3 beam 400 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SP50-0SS0
2 beam 500 Receiver 3SF78 44-6MS50-0KS1
2 beam 500 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SS50-0SS0
1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/38

6/40 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 44 ASIsafe series
internal evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Transceiver with Function package Muting ASIsafe 1)
No. of beams Beam distance Type Standard device
mm Order No.
Range 6.5 m
2 beam 500 Transceiver 3SF78 44-6MS50-0ST0
2 beam 500 Transceiver with integrated LED 3SF78 44-6MS50-0MT0
Reflective mirror for transceiver 3RG78 48-1TL

Light curtains with Function package Sequence control system ASIsafe 1)

Protective zone height Type Standard device Standard device
14 mm resolution 30 mm resolution
mm Order No. Order No.
Resolution 14 mm and 30 mm
300 Receiver 3SF78 44-6TB04-0SS1 3SF78 44-6TD04-0SS1
300 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB04-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD04-0SS0
450 Receiver 3SF78 44-6TB06-0SS1 3SF78 44-6TD06-0SS1
450 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB06-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD06-0SS0
600 Receiver 3SF78 44-6TB08-0SS1 3SF78 44-6TD08-0SS1
600 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB08-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD08-0SS0
750 Receiver 3SF78 44-6TB11-0SS1 3SF78 44-6TD11-0SS1
750 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB11-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD11-0SS0

6
900 Receiver 3SF78 44-6TB13-0SS1 3SF78 44-6TD13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3SF78 44-6SB13-0SS0 3SF78 44-6SD13-0SS0

1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/38
Additional products on request.

■ Dimensions
Standard 3SF78 44 light curtains and 3SF78 44 light grids, 3RG78 48-1TL reflective mirror (left) and
light grids additional dimensions muting transceiver (right)
1 1 52
52
7 2

7 2
1 4 0 ,1
4 0

4 0
B

B
C

696
A

734
602
2 2

2 2
N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 4 7

N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 4 8

5 2 5 5 5 2 5 5
102

FS1000107
140

$ Screw cap Pg 9 Additional dimensions for light grids only:

38

(receiver only, for local interface)

Type B C Beams
A Protective field height
(see Selection and Ordering data) 3SF78 44-..M 1184 300 4
B Overall length = 3SF78 44-..P 1034 400 3
Height of protective field A + 134 mm 3SF78 44-..S 734 500 2

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/41

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Overview ■ Design

3SF7842
Emitter
Host

3SF7842
Emitter
Guest
B
22 22

b=40 A

FS10_00004

3SF78 42 light curtains and light grids for ASIsafe for type 4
in accordance with IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution: 14, 30, 50, and 90 mm
3SF7842
• Protective zone heights: 150 mm to 3000 mm Receiver
Host
• 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light grids
• Connection to AS-Interface
Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective zone

6
heights and lengths or for an angular arrangement (optional). 3SF7842
Receiver
Two standard 3RG78 48-0AB mounting brackets each are Guest
enclosed with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories,
"Standard retaining angle set (1 set = 2 pieces, incl. screws) see
page 6/50. FS10_00003

Host/guest: Cascading basic device-subsequent device

6/42 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Design (continued)
3SF78 42 (ASIsafe) program overview
Unit type Function Output Connection For light curtains: Resolution see page
package type For light grids and transceivers: Range
14 mm 30 mm 50 mm 90 mm
Light − ASIsafe ASIsafe ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ “Light curtains” see page 6/44
curtains
Light grids − ASIsafe ASIsafe 0.8 m ... 18 m; 6 m ... 60 m “Light grids” see page 6/47
Transceiver − ASIsafe ASIsafe 6.5 m “Transceiver with ASIsafe”
see page 6/47
Accessories
Electrical connection
• Connecting cable with M12 connection “Connection cable to connect to
ASIsafe with a straight connector
and straight/angular M12 socket
for the 3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46
receiver light curtains”
see page 6/62
• ASIsafe modules “ASIsafe” see page 6/60
Assembly materials
• Fixing columns, reflecting mirror “Fixing columns” see page 6/57
• Muting mounting systems “Assembly materials”
see page 6/59
• Muting accessories “Muting lamp and accessories”
see page 6/61
Laser alignment assistance, diagnostic software “Laser alignment aids”
see page 6/59
6
■ Ordering notes
Included in the scope of supply
3SF78 42 light curtains, light grids and transceiver:
Transmitter:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Transmitter insert
Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Operating instructions/data sheets
• Additionally for 14 mm and 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0FH test rod
Guest devices of the 3RG78 42 series
Transmitter:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-0AB
• Additionally for 14 mm and 30 mm resolution:
3RG78 48-0AH test rod

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/43

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains 1)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 14 mm
150 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BB01 - 3RG78 42-6BB21
150 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BB00 - 3RG78 42-6BB20
225 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BC01 3SF78 42-6BC11 3RG78 42-6BC21
225 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BC00 3SF78 42-6BC10 3RG78 42-6BC20
300 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BD01 3SF78 42-6BD11 3RG78 42-6BD21
300 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BD00 3SF78 42-6BD10 3RG78 42-6BD20
450 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BE01 3SF78 42-6BE11 3RG78 42-6BE21
450 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BE00 3SF78 42-6BE10 3RG78 42-6BE20
600 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BF01 3SF78 42-6BF11 3RG78 42-6BF21
600 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BF00 3SF78 42-6BF10 3RG78 42-6BF20
750 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BG01 3SF78 42-6BG11 3RG78 42-6BG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BG00 3SF78 42-6BG10 3RG78 42-6BG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BH01 3SF78 42-6BH11 3RG78 42-6BH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BH00 3SF78 42-6BH10 3RG78 42-6BH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BJ01 3SF78 42-6BJ11 3RG78 42-6BJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BJ00 3SF78 42-6BJ10 3RG78 42-6BJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BK01 3SF78 42-6BK11 3RG78 42-6BK21

6 1200 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BK00 3SF78 42-6BK10 3RG78 42-6BK20

1350 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BL01 3SF78 42-6BL11 3RG78 42-6BL21
1350 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BL00 3SF78 42-6BL10 3RG78 42-6BL20
1500 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BM01 3SF78 42-6BM11 3RG78 42-6BM21
1500 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BM00 3SF78 42-6BM10 3RG78 42-6BM20
1650 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BN01 3SF78 42-6BN11 3RG78 42-6BN21
1650 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BN00 3SF78 42-6BN10 3RG78 42-6BN20
1800 Receiver 3SF78 42-6BP01 3SF78 42-6BP11 3RG78 42-6BP21
1800 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6BP00 3SF78 42-6BP10 3RG78 42-6BP20

1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/43

6/44 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Light curtains 1) (continued)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 30 mm
150 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DB01 − 3RG78 42-6DB21
150 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DB00 − 3RG78 42-6DB20
225 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DC01 3SF78 42-6DC11 3RG78 42-6DC21
225 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DC00 3SF78 42-6DC10 3RG78 42-6DC20
300 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DD01 3SF78 42-6DD11 3RG78 42-6DD21
300 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DD00 3SF78 42-6DD10 3RG78 42-6DD20
450 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DE01 3SF78 42-6DE11 3RG78 42-6DE21
450 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DE00 3SF78 42-6DE10 3RG78 42-6DE20
600 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DF01 3SF78 42-6DF11 3RG78 42-6DF21
600 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DF00 3SF78 42-6DF10 3RG78 42-6DF20
750 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DG01 3SF78 42-6DG11 3RG78 42-6DG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DG00 3SF78 42-6DG10 3RG78 42-6DG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DH01 3SF78 42-6DH11 3RG78 42-6DH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DH00 3SF78 42-6DH10 3RG78 42-6DH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DJ01 3SF78 42-6DJ11 3RG78 42-6DJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DJ00 3SF78 42-6DJ10 3RG78 42-6DJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DK01 3SF78 42-6DK11 3RG78 42-6DK21
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DK00 3SF78 42-6DK10 3RG78 42-6DK20 6
1350 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DL01 3SF78 42-6DL11 3RG78 42-6DL21
1350 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DL00 3SF78 42-6DL10 3RG78 42-6DL20
1500 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DM01 3SF78 42-6DM11 3RG78 42-6DM21
1500 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DM00 3SF78 42-6DM10 3RG78 42-6DM20
1650 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DN01 3SF78 42-6DN11 3RG78 42-6DN21
1650 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DN00 3SF78 42-6DN10 3RG78 42-6DN20
1800 Receiver 3SF78 42-6DP01 3SF78 42-6DP11 3RG78 42-6DP21
1800 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6DP00 3SF78 42-6DP10 3RG78 42-6DP20

1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/43

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/45

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Light curtains 1) (continued)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 50 mm
450 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EE01 3SF78 42-6EE11 3RG78 42-6EE21
450 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EE00 3SF78 42-6EE10 3RG78 42-6EE20
600 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EF01 3SF78 42-6EF11 3RG78 42-6EF21
600 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EF00 3SF78 42-6EF10 3RG78 42-6EF20
750 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EG01 3SF78 42-6EG11 3RG78 42-6EG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EG00 3SF78 42-6EG10 3RG78 42-6EG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EH01 3SF78 42-6EH11 3RG78 42-6EH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EH00 3SF78 42-6EH10 3RG78 42-6EH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EJ01 3SF78 42-6EJ11 3RG78 42-6EJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EJ00 3SF78 42-6EJ10 3RG78 42-6EJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EK01 3SF78 42-6EK11 3RG78 42-6EK21
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EK00 3SF78 42-6EK10 3RG78 42-6EK20
1350 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EL01 3SF78 42-6EL11 3RG78 42-6EL21
1350 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EL00 3SF78 42-6EL10 3RG78 42-6EL20
1500 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EM01 3SF78 42-6EM11 3RG78 42-6EM21
1500 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EM00 3SF78 42-6EM10 3RG78 42-6EM20
1650 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EN01 3SF78 42-6EN11 3RG78 42-6EN21

6 1650 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EN00 3SF78 42-6EN10 3RG78 42-6EN20

1800 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EP01 3SF78 42-6EP11 3RG78 42-6EP21
1800 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EP00 3SF78 42-6EP10 3RG78 42-6EP20
2100 Receiver 3SF78 42-6ER01 3SF78 42-6ER11 3RG78 42-6ER21
2100 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6ER00 3SF78 42-6ER10 3RG78 42-6ER20
2400 Receiver 3SF78 42-6ES01 3SF78 42-6ES11 3RG78 42-6ES21
2400 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6ES00 3SF78 42-6ES10 3RG78 42-6ES20
2700 Receiver 3SF78 42-6ET01 3SF78 42-6ET11 3RG78 42-6ET21
2700 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6ET00 3SF78 42-6ET10 3RG78 42-6ET20
3000 Receiver 3SF78 42-6EU01 3SF78 42-6EU11 3RG78 42-6EU21
3000 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6EU00 3SF78 42-6EU10 3RG78 42-6EU20

1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/43

6/46 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Light curtains 1) (continued)
Protective zone height Type Standard device Host device Guest device
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
Resolution 90 mm
750 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JG01 3SF78 42-6JG11 3RG78 42-6JG21
750 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JG00 3SF78 42-6JG10 3RG78 42-6JG20
900 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JH01 3SF78 42-6JH11 3RG78 42-6JH21
900 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JH00 3SF78 42-6JH10 3RG78 42-6JH20
1050 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JJ01 3SF78 42-6JJ11 3RG78 42-6JJ21
1050 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JJ00 3SF78 42-6JJ10 3RG78 42-6JJ20
1200 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JK01 3SF78 42-6JK11 3RG78 42-6JK21
1200 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JK00 3SF78 42-6JK10 3RG78 42-6JK20
1350 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JL01 3SF78 42-6JL11 3RG78 42-6JL21
1350 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JL00 3SF78 42-6JL10 3RG78 42-6JL20
1500 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JM01 3SF78 42-6JM11 3RG78 42-6JM21
1500 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JM00 3SF78 42-6JM10 3RG78 42-6JM20
1650 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JN01 3SF78 42-6JN11 3RG78 42-6JN21
1650 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JN00 3SF78 42-6JN10 3RG78 42-6JN20
1800 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JP01 3SF78 42-6JP11 3RG78 42-6JP21
1800 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JP00 3SF78 42-6JP10 3RG78 42-6JP20
2100 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JR01 3SF78 42-6JR11 3RG78 42-6JR21
2100 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JR00 3SF78 42-6JR10 3RG78 42-6JR20 6
2400 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JS01 3SF78 42-6JS11 3RG78 42-6JS21
2400 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JS00 3SF78 42-6JS10 3RG78 42-6JS20
2700 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JT01 3SF78 42-6JT11 3RG78 42-6JT21
2700 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JT00 3SF78 42-6JT10 3RG78 42-6JT20
3000 Receiver 3SF78 42-6JU01 3SF78 42-6JU11 3RG78 42-6JU21
3000 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6JU00 3SF78 42-6JU10 3RG78 42-6JU20

Light grids 1)
No. of beams Beam distance Type Range 0.8 ... 18 m Range 6 ... 60 m
mm Order No. Order No.
4 beam 300 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6MH00 3SF78 42-6MH50
4 beam 300 Receiver 3SF78 42-6MH01 3SF78 42-6MH51
3 beam 400 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6PG00 3SF78 42-016PG50
3 beam 400 Receiver 3SF78 42-6PG01 3SF78 42-6PG51
2 beam 500 Transmitter 3SF78 42-6SE00 3SF78 42-6SE50
2 beam 500 Receiver 3SF78 42-6SE01 3SF78 42-6SE51

Transceiver with ASIsafe 1)

No. of beams Beam distance Type Standard device
mm Order No.
Range 6.5 m
2 beam 500 Transceiver 3SF78 42-6TE01
Reflective mirror for transceiver 3RG78 48-1TL

1)
For "Ordering notes", see page 6/43

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/47

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3SF78 42 ASIsafe series
external evaluation, Type 4

■ Dimensions
3SF78 42 light curtains and grids 3SF78 42 light grids,
standard host and guest devices additional dimensions

9 9 ,5
4 0

2 2

I
C
B

B
A

9 9 ,5
2 2

2 2
5 2 5 5 5 2 5 5

A Height of protective field Additional dimensions for light grids only:

(see Selection and Ordering data)
Type B (mm) C (mm) Beams
B Overall length =
Height of protective field A + 84 mm 3SF78 42-6M… 1099 300 4
3SF78 42-6P… 999 400 3
3SF78 42-6S… 699 500 2

6/48 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 46 series, Internal evaluation, Type 4
Standard function package, transistor output

■ Overview
3RG78 46 light curtains with integrated processing unit for type
4 in accordance with IEC/EN 61496-1, -2.
• Resolution: 14, 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm
• Protective zone height: 150 mm to 1800 mm
• Two 360° mounting brackets 3RG78 48-2BA each are en-
closed with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories,
"360° mounting" supports see page 6/63).

3RG78 46 (FS420I) program overview

Unit type Function package Output Connection type Resolution see page
14 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm 90 mm
Light curtains Standard Transistor M12 plug connector ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 6/51
Accessories
Electrical connection
• Connecting cable with M12 connection 6/62
• Connecting cable for the K45F module ("ASIsafe Modul for 3RG48 43 light curtains, Type 2" see page 6/60)
to connect the 3RG7843 and 3RG7846 series to ASIsafe
6/62 6
• ASIsafe modules 6/60
Assembly materials
• Fixing columns, reflecting mirror 6/57
• Muting mounting systems 6/59
• Muting accessories 6/61
Laser alignment assistance, diagnostic software 6/59, 6/60

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/49

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 46 series, Internal evaluation, Type 4
Standard function package, transistor output

■ Technical specifications
Type 3RG78 46 Type 3RG78 46
Safety category IEC/EN 61496 Type 4 Synchronization Optically between emitter
and receiver
Detection capability (resolution) 14 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm,
40 mm, 90 mm Safety class (VDE 106) 1) III
Protective field width, range Ambient temperature
• 14 mm resolution 0.5 ... 5 m • Operation 0 ... +55 °C
• 20 mm resolution 0.7 ... 14 m • Storage –25 ... +70 °C
• 30 mm resolution 0.5 ... 9 m Relative humidity 15 ... 95 %
• 40 mm resolution 0.9 ... 20 m Degree of protection IP65
• 90 mm resolution 0.9 ... 20 m Signal inputs
Supply voltage Uv 24 V DC ± 20 % • Emitter pin 4
(emitter and receiver) (external power pack with safe
isolation and compensation of - test input • Input: Contact or transistor
20 ms voltage dip is necessary, connected to +24 V DC
minimum 1 A current reserve) • 0 V or spare = Test
Residual ripple of supply voltage ± 5 % within the limits of Uv • Current load: 20 mA max.
Current consumption • Receiver pin 1
• Emitter 75 mA - start/restart key Input: Contact (NO) connected to
24 V DC, current load: 15 mA max.
• Receiver 110 mA (without external load)
- error/pollution group alarm Output: pnp: Connected to
24 V DC , 80 mA max.
General value for external fuse in 1 A medium time-lag
the transmitter and receiver supply • Receiver pin 3
leads
- EDM (contactor control) • Input: Contact (NC) connected to
Permissible conductor cross-sec- 0V

6
tion • Current load: 15 mA max
• Emitter 0.25 mm2 - without EDM 24 V DC connection
• Emitter 0.14 mm2 • Receiver pin 4
Emitter Light-emitting diodes according to - with RES Input: 24 V DC
EN 60825-1:1994+
A1:2002+A:2001 - without RES Jumper to pin 1
• Class 1
• Wave length 950 nm
• Power < 50 µW
1)
The circuits connected to the inputs and outputs must comply with the
air gaps and creepage distances specified in the applicable standards
for safe isolation.

OSSD transistor outputs 2 pnp safety-related transistor outputs, cross-connection monitored, short-circuit-proof
Minimum Typical Maximum
Operational voltage active high – +22 V –
(Uv – 1.6 V)
For resistive load Irated = 250 mA
Operational voltage, low -80 V1) 0V + 2,8 V
Operational current – 250 mA –
Leakage current – < 5 µA < 20 µA
Load capacitance – – < 220 nF
Load inductance – – < 2,0 H
Permissible line resistance to load – – < 300 Ω2)
Permissible line length between – – 100 m
receiver and load (with 0.25 mm2)
Test pulse width 30 µs – 100 µs
Test pulse space – – 22 µs
OSSD reactivation time after beam 40 ms 100 ms –
interruption (without RES)
OSSD response time Depending on number of beams, see operating instructions
1)
Fast recovery voltage for contactors, otherwise 0 V
2)
Please note further constraints due to cable length and load current.

6/50 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 46 series, Internal evaluation, Type 4
Standard function package, transistor output

■ Ordering notes
Included in the scope of supply:
Light curtains 3RG78 46
Transmitter: Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-2BA • Mounting bracket set 3RG7848-2BA
• Transmitter insert • Operating instructions/data sheets
• in addition with resolution 14/30 mm
test rod 3RG78 48-0AH
• in addition with resolution 20 mm
test rod 3RG78 48-1CH
• in addition with resolution 40 mm
test rod 3RG78 48-1BH

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains with M12 plug connection
Protective Type Resolution 14 mm Resolution 20 mm Resolution 30 mm
zone height
mm Order No. Order No. Order No.
SIMATIC FS420I
150 Receiver – 3RG78 46-3SC02-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD02-0SS1
150 Transmitter – 3RG78 46-3SC02-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD02-0SS0
225 Receiver – 3RG78 46-3SC03-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD03-0SS1
225 Transmitter – 3RG78 46-3SC03-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD03-0SS0
300
300
Receiver
Transmitter
3RG7846-3SB04-0SS1
3RG7846-3SB04-0SS0
3RG78 46-3SC04-0SS1
3RG78 46-3SC04-0SS0
3RG78 46-3SD04-0SS1
3RG78 46-3SD04-0SS0
6
450 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB06-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC06-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD06-0SS1
450 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB06-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC06-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD06-0SS0
600 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB08-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC08-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD08-0SS1
600 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB08-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC08-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD08-0SS0
750 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB11-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC11-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD11-0SS1
750 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB11-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC11-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD11-0SS0
900 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB13-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC13-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB13-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC13-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD13-0SS0
1050 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB15-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC15-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD15-0SS1
1050 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB15-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC15-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD15-0SS0
1200 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB17-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC17-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD17-0SS1
1200 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB17-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC17-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD17-0SS0
1350 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB20-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC20-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD20-0SS1
1350 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB20-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC20-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD20-0SS0
1500 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB22-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC22-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD22-0SS1
1500 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB22-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC22-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD22-0SS0
1650 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB24-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC24-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD24-0SS1
1650 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB24-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC24-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD24-0SS0
1800 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SB26-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SC26-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SD26-0SS1
1800 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SB26-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SC26-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SD26-0SS0

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/51

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 46 series, Internal evaluation, Type 4
Standard function package, transistor output

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains with M12 plug connection 1)
Protective zone height Type Resolution 40 mm Resolution 90 mm
mm Order No. Order No.
SIMATIC FS420I
150 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF02-0SS1 –
150 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF02-0SS0 –
225 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF03-0SS1 –
225 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF03-0SS0 –
300 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF04-0SS1 –
300 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF04-0SS0 –
450 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF06-0SS1 –
450 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF06-0SS0 –
600 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF08-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ08-0SS0
600 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF08-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ08-0SS1
750 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF11-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ11-0SS1
750 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF11-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ11-0SS0
900 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF13-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF13-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ13-0SS0
1050 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF15-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ15-0SS1
1050 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF15-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ15-0SS0
1200 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF17-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ17-0SS1

6 1200 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF17-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ17-0SS0

1350 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF20-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ20-0SS1
1350 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF20-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ20-0SS0
1500 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF22-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ22-0SS1
1500 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF22-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ22-0SS0
1650 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF24-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ24-0SS1
1650 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF24-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ24-0SS0
1800 Receiver 3RG78 46-3SF26-0SS1 3RG78 46-3SJ26-0SS1
1800 Transmitter 3RG78 46-3SF26-0SS0 3RG78 46-3SJ26-0SS0
1)
Ordering notes for "3RG78 46 light curtains" see page 6/51

■ Dimensions
3RG78 46 light curtains with internal evaluation, Type 4
11

11

34,6 34,6
FS10_00081
17

17

3RG7813 3RG7813
s

s
B

B
A

A
8

8
9

29 24 24 29

Transmitter Receiver
A Height of protective field
(see Selection and Ordering data)
B Overall length without connector = Height of protective field A + 75.5 mm

6/52 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 43 series, Internal evaluation, Type 2
Standard Function package, Transistor output

■ Overview
3RG78 43 light curtains with integrated startup/restart inhibit and
contactor control for type 2 according to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2.
• Developed according to EN 61508 (SIL 2)
• Risk assessment, suitable according to pr EN ISO 13849-1
• Resolution 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm
• Protective zone height: 150 mm to 1800 mm
Two 360° mounting brackets 3RG78 48-2BA each are enclosed
with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories
"360° mounting supports" see page 6/63)

3RG78 43 (FS420I) program overview

Unit type Function package Output Connection type Resolution see page
20 mm 30 mm 40 mm 90 mm
Light curtains Standard Transistor M12 plug connector ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 6/55
Accessories
Electrical connection
• Connecting cable with M12 connection 6/62
• Connecting cable for the K45F module ("ASIsafe Modulee for 3RG48 43 light curtains, Type 2" see page 6/60)
to connect the 3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46 series to ASIsafe
6/62
6
• ASIsafe modules 6/60
Assembly materials
• Fixing columns, reflecting mirror 6/57
• Muting mounting systems 6/59
• Muting accessories 6/61
Laser alignment aids, diagnostic software 6/59, 6/60

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/53

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 43 series, Internal evaluation, Type 2
Standard Function package, Transistor output

■ Technical specifications
Type 3RG78 43 Type 3RG78 43
Safety category EN IEC 61496; Typ 2 Emitter Light-emitting diodes according to
SIL2 to IEC 61508 EN 60825-1:1994+
A1:2002+A:2001
Detection capability (resolution) 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm, 90 mm
• Class 1
Protective field width, range
• Wave length 950 nm
• for 20 mm resolution 0.5 ... 15 m
• Pulse duration 7 µs
• for 30 mm resolution 0 ... 8 m
• Pulse interval 3.1 ms
• for 40 mm resolution 0.8 ... 20 m
• Power < 10 µW
• for 90 mm resolution 0.8 ... 20 m
Synchronization Optically between emitter
Supply voltage UV 24 V DC ± 20 % and receiver
(emitter and receiver) (external power pack with
safe isolation and compensation Test repeat time for 100 ms
of 20 ms voltage dip is necessary, integrated cyclical test
min. 1 A current reserve)
Safety class (VDE 106) III1)
Residual ripple of supply voltage ± 5 % within the limits of UV
Ambient temperature
Current consumption
• Operation 0 ... +50 °C
• Emitter 45 mA
• Storage –25 ... +70 °C
• Receiver 140 mA (without external load)
Relative humidity 15 ... 95 %
General value for external fuse 1A
in the transmitter and receiver Degree of protection IP65
supply leads Signal inputs
Permissible conductor • Emitter test input Input: Contact or transistor
cross-section connected to +24 V DC,
• Emitter 0.25 mm2 current load: 20 mA max.

6 • Receiver 0.14 mm2 • Receiver signal input BA1 Input: Contact or transistor
connected to +24 V DC,
or connect to GND,
current load: 10 mA max.
• Receiver signal input BA2 Input: Contact or transistor
connected to +24 V DC,
or connect to GND,
current load: 10 mA max.
1) The circuits connected to the inputs and outputs must comply with the
air gaps and creepage distances specified in the applicable standards
for safe isolation.

Transistor outputs receiver

OSSD transistor outputs 2 pnp safety-related transistor outputs, short-circuit-proof
minimal typisch maximal
Operational voltage active high UV - 1.9 V UV - 1 V UV - 0.8 V
Operational voltage, low – 200 mV +1V
Operational current – – 250 mA
Leakage current – < 2 µA1) –
Load capacitance – – < 2.2 µF
Load inductance – – 2.0 H
Permissible line resistance to load – – < 50 Ω2)
Permissible conductor – – 0.14 mm2
cross-section: Receiver
Permissible cable lengths – – 100 m
between receiver and load
Auxiliary pulse width 20 µs – 230 µs
Auxiliary pulse interval 3.7 ms – 46 ms
OSSD reactivation time after – 100 ms –
beam interruption (without RES)
OSSD response time Depending on number of beams, see operating instructions
1)
If an error occurs (when disconnecting the GND line), the output acts like a
120 kΩ resistance to UV. A downstream safety PLC may not identify this as
a logical "1".
2)
Please note further constraints due to cable length and load current.

6/54 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 43 series, Internal evaluation, Type 2
Standard Function package, Transistor output

■ Ordering notes
Included in the scope of supply:
Light curtains 3RG78 43
Transmitter: Receiver:
• Mounting bracket set 3RG78 48-2BA • Mounting bracket set 3RG7848-2BA
• Transmitter insert • Operating instructions/data sheets

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains with M12 plug connection
Protective zone height Type Resolution 20 mm Resolution 30 mm
mm Order No. Order No.
SIMATIC FS420I
150 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC02-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD02-0SS1
150 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC02-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD02-0SS0
225 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC03-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD03-0SS1
225 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC03-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD03-0SS0
300 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC04-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD04-0SS1
300 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC04-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD04-0SS0
450 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC06-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD06-0SS1
450 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC06-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD06-0SS0
600 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC08-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD08-0SS1
600 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC08-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD08-0SS0
750 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC11-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD11-0SS1 6
750 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC11-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD11-0SS0
900 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC13-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC13-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD13-0SS0
1050 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC15-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD15-0SS1
1050 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC15-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD15-0SS0
1200 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC17-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD17-0SS1
1200 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC17-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD17-0SS0
1350 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC20-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD20-0SS1
1350 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC20-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD20-0SS0
1500 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC22-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD22-0SS1
1500 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC22-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD22-0SS0
1650 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC24-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD24-0SS1
1650 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC24-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD24-0SS0
1800 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SC26-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SD26-0SS1
1800 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SC26-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SD26-0SS0

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/55

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
3RG78 43 series, Internal evaluation, Type 2
Standard Function package, Transistor output

■ Selection and Ordering data

Light curtains with M12 plug connection1)
Protective zone height Type Resolution 40 mm Resolution 90 mm
mm Order No. Order No.
SIMATIC FS420I
150 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF02-0SS1 –
150 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF02-0SS0 –
225 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF03-0SS1 –
225 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF03-0SS0 –
300 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF04-0SS1 –
300 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF04-0SS0 –
450 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF06-0SS1 –
450 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF06-0SS0 –
600 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF08-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ08-0SS0
600 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF08-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ08-0SS1
750 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF11-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ11-0SS1
750 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF11-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ11-0SS0
900 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF13-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ13-0SS1
900 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF13-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ13-0SS0
1050 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF15-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ15-0SS1
1050 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF15-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ15-0SS0
1200 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF17-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ17-0SS1

6 1200 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF17-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ17-0SS0

1350 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF20-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ20-0SS1
1350 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF20-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ20-0SS0
1500 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF22-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ22-0SS1
1500 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF22-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ22-0SS0
1650 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF24-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ24-0SS1
1650 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF24-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ24-0SS0
1800 Receiver 3RG78 43-3SF26-0SS1 3RG78 43-3SJ26-0SS1
1800 Transmitter 3RG78 43-3SF26-0SS0 3RG78 43-3SJ26-0SS0
1)
Ordering notes for "3RG78 43 light curtains" see page 6/55

■ Dimensions
3RG78 43-3S...-0SS light curtains
11

11

34,6 34,6
FS10_00081
17

17

3RG7813 3RG7813
s

s
B

B
A

A
8

8
9

29 24 24 29

Emitter Receiver
A Height of protective field
(see selection and ordering data)
B Overall length without connector = Height of protective field A + 75.5 mm

6/56 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Overview
To facilitate installation, alignment, commissioning and trouble- In addition, PC software can be used to visualize and record the
shooting, a practical accessories package containing mounting function of the light curtains as well as the processing units.
columns, reflecting mirror columns, reflecting mirrors, mounting
supports, protective disks and laser alignment tools is available.

■ Selection and Ordering data

Length Order No.
mm
Mounting columns
Suited for the 3RG78 43, 3RG78 44, 3RG78 45, 3RG78 46
as well as 3SF78 42 and 3SF78 44 series
1060 3RG78 48-1CL
1360 3RG78 48-1CP
1660 3RG78 48-1CR
1960 3RG78 48-1CU
Reflecting mirror for light curtains
The 3RG78 43, 3RG78 44, 3RG78 45, 3RG78 46
as well as 3SF78 42 and 3SF78 44 series
Reflecting mirrors
210 3RG78 48-1DC
285 3RG78 48-1DD
360 3RG78 48-1DL
510 3RG78 48-1DM
660 3RG78 48-1DN 6
810 3RG78 48-1DP
960 3RG78 48-1DR
1110 3RG78 48-1DU
1260 3RG78 48-1DE
1410 3RG78 48-1DF
1560 3RG78 48-1DG
1710 3RG78 48-1DH
1860 3RG78 48-1DK
Reflecting mirror columns
1060 3RG78 48-0DL
1360 3RG78 48-0DP
1660 3RG78 48-0DR
1960 3RG78 48-0DU

Reflecting mirror columns for light grids

The 3RG78 44, 3RG78 45 as well as 3SF78 42 and 3SF78 44 series
Adjustable separate mirrors
1060, 2-beam 3RG78 48-0FL
1360, 3-beam 3RG78 48-0FP
1360, 4-beam 3RG78 48-0FR

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/57

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Protective disks
The protective disks can prevent damage
to the light curtains and light grids.
The protective disks can be easily replaced, if necessary.
For the 3RG78 42, 3RG78 44, 3RG78 45, 3SF78 42 and 3SF78 44 series
For protective field height
300 mm 3RG78 48-4AA
450 mm 3RG78 48-4BA
600 mm 3RG78 48-4CA
750 mm 3RG78 48-4DA
900 mm 3RG78 48-4FA
1050 mm 3RG78 48-4GA
1200 mm 3RG78 48-4HA
1350 mm 3RG78 48-4KA
1500 mm 3RG78 48-4LA
1650 mm 3RG78 48-4MA
1800 mm 3RG78 48-4NA
Holder set with 2 disk clamps for protective disks for 3RG78 48-4SA
protective field heights up to 900 mm
Holder set with 3 disk clamps for protective disks for 3RG78 48-4TA
protective field heights of 900 mm and above
For the 3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46 series
6 For protective field height
300 mm 3RG78 48-4DS
450 mm 3RG78 48-4FS
600 mm 3RG78 48-4GS
750 mm 3RG78 48-4HS
900 mm 3RG78 48-4KS
1050 mm 3RG78 48-4LS
1200 mm 3RG78 48-4MS
1350 mm 3RG78 48-4NS
1500 mm 3RG78 48-4SS
1650 mm 3RG78 48-4TS
1800 mm 3RG78 48-4US
Holder set with 2 disk clamps for protective disks for 3RG78 48-4BS
protective field heights up to 900 mm
Holder set with 3 disk clamps for protective disks for 3RG78 48-4CS
protective field heights of 900 mm and above

6/58 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Assembly materials
Bracket, hinged with vibration damping 3RG78 48-0BB
(incl. 2 screws and 2 sliding blocks)

Standard holding bracket kit 3RG78 48-0AB

(1 set = 2 units, incl. screws)

Sliding blocks (1 set = 2 units), M6 3RG78 48-0AC

Muting mounting system, 3RG78 48-2AF
total length 1000 mm with two 12 mm circular bars for mounting columns
("Mounting columns" see page 6/57)
Muting mounting system, 3RG78 48-2LF
total length 1000 mm with 2 reflectors
Muting mounting system for sequential muting, 3RG78 48-2DF
total length 1000 mm with four 12 mm circular bars for mounting columns
("Mounting columns" see page 6/57)
Muting mounting system for sequential muting, 3RG78 48-2KF
total length 1000 mm with 4 reflectors
Muting mounting system, 3RG78 48-2GF
total length 350 mm with two 12 mm circular bars for mounting columns
("Mounting columns" see page 6/57)
Muting mounting system to bolt mount directly to the unit 3RG78 48-2HF
for 2 sensors with angular circular bars for mounting columns
("Mounting columns" see page 6/57)
Holding bar for mounting to muting mounting system, 3RX7 315
diameter 12 mm, length 200 mm
Holding bar for mounting to muting mounting system, 3RX7 316
6
diameter 12 mm, length 300 mm
Holding plate to hold sensor, 3RX7 326
mounting on 12 mm circular bar for sensor holding system
Mounting base with 12 mm receptacle for fixing system 3RX7 322
Keys
Safety key for teach-in 3RG78 48-2AH

Laser alignment aids

Standard version for slot mounting 3RG78 48-1AB
For installation with mounting columns 3RG78 48-1AG
For light barriers and laser scanners 3RG78 48-1AP

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/59

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Test rods
With 14 mm and 30 mm resolution 3RG78 48-0AH
Set for 3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 light curtains 3RG78 48-0FH
Diagnostics software
for evaluation units, including PC cable 3RG78 48-4AC

SafetyLab diagnostics and parameterization software with PC cable C 3RG78 48-2SL

PC connecting lead, including connector, 9-pole with optical interface 3RG78 38-1DC

Type Length Poles Order No.

6 ASIsafe
m

ASIsafe module 3RK12 05-0BQ21-0AA3

for 3RG78 43 type 2 light curtains
ASIsafe module 3RK12 05-0BQ24-0AA3
for 3RG78 46 type 4 light curtains
ASIsafe adapter for 3SF7844 series receiver 3RG78 38-1DG
for use with 3RG7838-1EA and 3RG7838-1EB
5-pin connecting cables, for bus connection and
24 V power supply
ASIsafe adapter for 3SF78 4 emitter and 3RX98 01-0AA00
M12 bus terminal receiver
for ASIsafe flat cable
Connecting cable for 3RG7838-1DG 1 5-pin 3RG78 38-1EA
ASIsafe adapter
M12 ASIsafe adapter for 3SF78 44 M12 receiver
Connecting cable for 3RG7838-1DG 2 5-pin 3RG78 38-1EB
ASIsafe adapter
M12 ASIsafe adapter for 3SF78 44 M12 receiver

6/60 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

Type Length Poles Order No.
m
Cable and cable boxes for the 3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 series
Cable for local connection, 3 3RG78 48-2AK
27 with M12 angular connector, 8-pin
Cable for local connection, 10 3RG78 48-2BK
5 6 with M12 angular connector, 8-pin
External local connection box, 0.5 3RG78 48-2AB
3 4 with six M12 sockets and cable; for connecting
the muting sensors and the muting lamp
98
73

1 2

33
5

6
7 5
1 4
3
2
8
54
26
23

FS10_00306

6
Type Rated voltage Order No.
Muting lamp and accessories
Continuous light element, clear 24 ... 230 V AC/DC 8WD42 00-1AE

Connecting element with end cover 8WD42 08-0AA

for conduit, floor and angled installation

Conduit, single, length 100 mm 8WD42 08-0EF

Foot, single, 8WD42 08-0DE
in plastic, for floor installation

Bracket for wall mounting 8WD42 08-0CA

Incandescent lamp, 5W, AC/DC 24 8WD43 28-1XX

BA 15d base

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/61

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Selection and Ordering data (continued)

M12 socket Connecting cable Length Order No.
Connection cable to connect to ASIsafe with a straight connector and
straight/angular M12 socket for the 3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46 emitter light curtains
straight 5-pin, shielded 5m 3RG78 48-3EA
angled 5-pin, shielded 5m 3RG78 48-3EB
straight 5-pin, shielded 10 m 3RG78 48-3EC
angled 5-pin, shielded 10 m 3RG78 48-3ED
straight 5-pin, shielded 15 m 3RG78 48-3EE
angled 5-pin, shielded 15 m 3RG78 48-3EF
Connection cable to connect to ASIsafe with a straight connector and
straight/angular M12 socket for the 3RG78 43 and 3RG78 46 receiver light curtains
straight 8-pin, shielded 5m 3RG78 48-3CA
angled 8-pin, shielded 5m 3RG78 48-3CB
straight 8-pin, shielded 10 m 3RG78 48-3CC
angled 8-pin, shielded 10 m 3RG78 48-3CD
straight 8-pin, shielded 15 m 3RG78 48-3CE
angled 8-pin, shielded 15 m 3RG78 48-3CF

Description Order No.

Mounting hardware for 3RG78 43 and 3RG 78 46 light curtains
360 ° bracket 3RG78 48-2BA

6
L bracket 3RG78 48-2BB

Z bracket 3RG78 48-2BC

360° support set, comprising two 360° supports 3RG78 48-2BD

L bracket set, comprising two L brackets 3RG78 48-2BE
Z bracket set, comprising two Z brackets 3RG78 48-2BF
Holder, swivel-mounted, with vibration damping 3RG78 48-0BB
Test rods
20 mm test rod 3RG78 48-1CH
30 mm test rod 3RG78 48-0AH
40 mm test rod 3RG78 48-1BH

6/62 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Dimensions
3RG78 48-0C. 3RG78 48-0D., 3RG78 48-0F.
Type A B
mounting column reflecting mirror column
3RG78 48-0.L 1060 974
98,4 83 3RG78 48-0.P 1360 1274
94,4 3RG78 48-0.R 1660 1574

NSC0_00432a
3RG78 48-0.U 1960 1874
NSC0_00431a

B
A
A

71

3
60

3
60

1
Ø 160

4
63
29,2
Ø 160

4
95,6

$ Light curtain
% 8 bore holes, diameter = 16 mm
& Plastic spring elements with
automatic return mechanism
( 3 bore holes in base for dowels,
diameter = 10 mm, depth = 80 mm
6
3RG78 48-0AB standard mounting bracket 3RG78 48-0BB support,
(included in scope of supply) swivel-mounted, with vibration damping

ca. Slot
24,5
NSC00434

44
ANSC00435

22
R 10
70

6,2 10
60
35
33,5

10
(24)

9,5

54

90° 11,3
ca. 40

M6
ca. 34

6,2
4

M6
Swivel angle

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/63

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Dimensions (continued)
Muting mounting system 3RG78 48-2GF muting mounting system,
length 350 mm with 2 circular bars

1000 L
= =
A

150
B

40
100

100
40
FS1000108 C D
Ø12 200 FS10_00260

A V2A circular bar 12 x 100 mm

B Fixing plate
C Aluminum profile
D Cover

3RG78 48-2DF muting mounting system for sequential muting, 3RG78 48-2KF muting mounting system for sequential muting,
total length 1000 mm with four 12 mm circular bars length 1000 mm with four reflectors

1000 1000

FS10_00262
150
40
100

Ø12 200 FS10_00261

6
3RG78 48-2BB L-bracket 3RG78 48-2BC Z-bracket

4 25 12,1
R10

R3,1 R3,1
39

R3,1
29
16

R10 R10
73
61

6,2
FS10_00079 R6
12
6,2

30
22
10

FS10_00080
R3,1
18,4

R3,1
10,8 4
31,7

R10
12

6/64 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light grids
Mounting parts

■ Dimensions (continued)
3RG78 48-2BA support 360° 3RG78 48-0BB pivoting support

34
-26,5 11,3
20
8,2 8
6,2
a
9,1
41,2

70

60
29,1
24,5

35
FS10_00082

10
FS10_00084
(34-37)
(50-53)

-40
-34
24 b
32

Signalling column with 8WD42 08-0DE pedestal 8WD42 08-0AA connecting element
8WD42 00-1AE continuous light element,
8WD42 08-0EF tube and 0
8WD42 08-0DE pedestal Ø 5,5 1
37

Ø 50
4 2

6
FS10_00150

3
1,5

Ø 70

54
FS10_00151

8WD42 08-0CA bracket 21,3

for wall mounting FS10_00153
132,7
117

72

32

31,4
12

25

FS10_00152
38

Ø 21,6
1,5

Ø 70 Ø 52
50

Ø 70

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/65

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner

■ Overview
Our optical distance sensors provide perfect all-round protec- With up to four programmable protective field pairs that can be
tion to type 3 in accordance with IEC/EN 61496. selected during operation, our laser scanners can be optimally
adapted to any application – on machines, production robots,
In an operating field of 190° and over a distance of up to 4.0 m conveyor systems or vehicles.
(up to 15 m in non-safety-related applications), the laser scanner
reliably senses every object and every person. And it works so Different variants support optimal integration in the automation
simply: The distance sensor emits light pulses at regular inter- system: Whether conventionally in the safety circuit, over
vals. PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe or over AS-Interface with ASIsafe.
If they hit an obstruction, the sensor receives the reflected light
and evaluates it. If this is evaluated as the predefined area to be
protected, a Stop function is triggered.

■ Application
Horizontal danger zone protection Route monitoring for automatic guided vehicle systems

SF4 SF1

SF3
6
SF2
NSC0_00619 NSC0_00620

• Reliable detection of persons and objects in danger zones • Reliable detection of persons and objects approaching the
around machines and plants. vehicle.
• Flexible programming of almost any protection and warning • The laser scanner offers a greater protection range than
zones. bumpers and, therefore, permits higher speeds.
Horizontal danger zone protection with more than one
protective field Collision protection for shifting units

c
c

SF 2
WF 2
SF 2 SF1
(active)
SF2
b
WF 1
(active)

NSC0_00646 NSC0_00622

• Reliable detection of persons in different danger zones by • Reliable protection of persons in the path of the vehicle.
switching between protective fields. • Objects in the path of the vehicle are detected in good time
• Increased availability due to accurate protection of just the and damage to the vehicle or its load is prevented.
fields that are currently active.
Other applications
• Many different types of hazardous area protection
• Protection for rooms and entrances
• Projecting object monitoring to protect machines and
personnel
• Non-safety-relevant measuring or detection tasks
(e.g. determining distances, positions, or contours).

6/66 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner

■ Application (continued)
Access protection by means of entry control Securing danger zones by means of hand and arm guards
Access protection by means of entry control can be used when If a machine operator has to be close to the dangerous move-
the entry location to a machine or to a danger zone can be pre- ment or if the operator coordinates the positioning and removal
cisely defined and when no other unsecured access to this area of workpieces at the machine, danger zone protection must be
exists. implemented at the machine.
The laser scanner is preferably mounted above the entry point, A protective device must be used to guard these danger zones.
aligned vertically. To protect the protective devices, laser The laser scanner is approved for securing danger zones by
scanners and fence from inadvertent adjustment and malicious means of hand and arm guards and can, also in combination
manipulation, the protective fields of the laser scanners must be with protective field changeover, ensure flexible work safety. To
defined using reference contours. In this operating mode, the protect the protective devices, laser scanners and the screens
scanner uses the sampled environment as a reference and can (attached to the sides as a reference and as additional access
therefore monitor changes to the structure of the protective protection) from inadvertent adjustment and malicious manipu-
equipment as well as each individual measurement to detect an lation, the protective fields of the laser scanners must be defined
entering person. using reference contours.
.

1 1

3
3 6

2 4 FS10_00226
4 5
FS10_00225

Access through entry control Application example for a circular table

1 Laser scanners 1 Laser scanners
2 Reference contour 2 Reference contour
3 Emergency stop 3 Emergency stop
4 Protective field 4, 5 Protective fields with reference classes

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/67

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe
SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner

■ Function
The laser scanner is an optical, contact-free surface scanner – Four protective field/warning field pairs
designed primarily for operator protection.
Four variable protective field pairs for the personnel protective
field and warning field, which can be easily set on the PC, ensure
that the laser scanner can be adapted to suit any requirement.

E Sc

Reflection
SF 3 SF 1 SF 4

SF 2

NSC0_00623
Only personnel protective fields are shown

NSC0_00625
Using a laser diode with transmission optics, the laser scanner
continuously generates bundled light pulses that are scattered
throughout the operating range by an integrated rotating mirror. It can be implemented in stationary applications (machines and
If objects or persons enter the field, it evaluates the reflected installations) or mobile applications (vehicles, automatic guided
light pulses and continuously calculates the exact position coor- vehicle systems, or shifting units). In the case of a robot, for ex-
dinates on the basis of the light propagation time. If the defined ample, different operating ranges can be protected, whereby
personnel protective field is penetrated, the laser scanner stops the laser scanner operates in succession with regard to time and
the machine immediately (within the system response time). space. In the case of automatic guided vehicle systems, four
The Stop function is reset when the protective field is free again, programmable protective fields can be protected (e.g. rapid
6 either automatically or following acknowledgement (depending
on the operating mode).
travel, slow travel, turning left, turning right).
LS4soft operator software
The operating range of the laser scanner spans 190° and is
subdivided into angle segments of 0.36°. Thanks to the PC operator software LS4soft, it could not be
easier to optimize the laser scanner settings. The following
functions have been integrated:
0.36° • User-friendly configuration of the protective field using a PC
or laptop
• Configuration of additional functions, such as protective field
selection, restart inhibit, etc. by means of a software wizard
• Comprehensive range of displays, e.g. defined protective
fields, current scan contours, system settings, etc. reliable,
password-protected access with different authorization levels
• Executable under Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP
The operator software is supplied with the laser scanner.

– 5° 185°
NSC0_00624

The scan rate is 25 scans/second, i.e. one light pulse every

40 ms in each segment. A special algorithm ensures that objects
larger than 70 mm (this corresponds to the scanner resolution)
can be reliably detected and that contamination (e.g. dust) does
not reduce system availability. The laser scanner detects people
(even if they are wearing dark clothing) at a distance of up to 4 m
(failsafe). People or objects can, however, be detected at a dis-
tance of up to 15 m so that a warning can be output, for example
(not safety relevant).

6/68 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner
ASIsafe laser scanner

■ Overview

ASIsafe laser scanner

■ Integration
ASIsafe laser scanner

X5

and
and
X1
X2 6
or X3
X4

FS10_00136

Connector pin assignment

Terminal Description Item Connectable accessories Order No.
X1 M12 connector for AS-Interface connection $ Laser scanner connecting cable to 3RG78 38-1EA (1 m)
(bus connection and 24 V DC power supply) M12 AS-Interface adapter 3RG78 38-1EB (2 m)
% M12 AS-Interface adapter 3RG78 38-1DG
X2 Connection for AS-Interface addressing and & AS-Interface addressing and diagnostics unit 3RK1 904-2AB01
diagnostics unit
( Connecting cable with M12 socket and 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
M12 plug (3-core) (1.5 m)
X3 M12 socket for connecting the changeover ) M12 jumper plug 3RG78 38-1DF
for the protective fields (suitable for protection field 1)
* M12 connector with terminal housing, 5-pin 3RX8 000-0CD55
X4 M12 connector for connecting a restart button + M12 cable socket with terminal housing, 5-pin 3RX8 000-0CB55
(optional)
X5 Optical PC interface , PC connecting cable for laser scanner 3RG78 38-1DC
with optical interface, 9-pin

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/69

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner
ASIsafe laser scanner

■ Technical specifications
Type ASIsafe Laserscanner Type ASIsafe Laserscanner
Protective field Contour measurement
Detection range 0 ... 4 m Detection range 0 ... 50 m
Luminance factor min. 1.8 % Luminance factor min. 20 %
Object size and diameter 70 mm (cylindrical test body) Output RS 232 serial interface via
infrared interface
• Response time
Radial resolution 5 mm
- dual evaluation (2 scans) 85 ms (laser scanner only, without
AS-Interface system times) Lateral resolution 0.36 °
- adjustable up to 16 scans 645 ms (laser scanner only, with- Supply voltage
out AS-Interface system times)
• Via AS-Interface network 29.5 ... 31.6 V
Number 4 (selectable via switching inputs) (to AS-Interface specification)
Safety category Category 3 to EN 954-1, type 3 to • Via external supply 24 V DC (+/-20 %)
IEC 61496-1 or EN 61496-3
• Note The power pack for the external
Output Secure AS-Interface interface power supply and the AS-Inter-
face power pack for supplying
Start Start test and start inhibit the AS-Interface components
can be set separately must have a safe isolation to
Restart 160 ms to 10 s IEC 60742 and must bridge brief
(can be set or is manual) power failures of up to 20 ms
(e.g. AS-Interface power pack
Protective field supplement 3RX9 307-0AA00).
• For deactivated dust suppression 83 mm Overcurrent protection Fuse 1.25 A (medium slow)
• For activated dust suppression Typical current consumption from 400 mA
- protective field size < 3.5 mm 83 mm supply circuit

- protective field size > 3.5 mm 100 mm Typical current consumption from 50 mA

6
AS-Interface circuit
• Additional supplement in the
case of existing retro-reflectors Inputs
or highly reflective surfaces Restart/reset Connection of a command unit
(e.g. certain metals or ceramics) for operating mode with restart
in the scan plane inhibit and/or device reset,
- more than 1.2 m behind the 0 mm dynamically monitored,
protective field line 24 V DC optically decoupled
- in protective field or up to 1.2 m 110 mm Field pair changeover Selection from four field pairs
behind the protective field line via 4 control leads with internal
monitoring (1 field pair = 1 pro-
Warning field tective field and 1 warning field),
24 V optically decoupled
Detection range 0 ... 15 m
Signal definition
Luminance factor min. 20 %
• High (logical 1) 16 ... 30 V
Object size 150 × 150 mm
• Low (logical 0) <3V
Response time
Control cable
• dual evaluation (2 scans) 85 ms (laser scanner only, without
AS-Interface system times) • Length Max. 50 m (cable cross-section:
0.5 mm2, shielded)
• adjustable up to 16 scans 645 ms (laser scanner only, with-
out AS-Interface system times) AS-Interface address programming Connection of a standard
AS-Interface address program-
No. of warning fields 4 (selectable via switching inputs)
ming device
Output AS Interface
RS232 interfaces via For device parameterization and
infrared interface field definition

6/70 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner
ASIsafe laser scanner

■ Technical specifications (continued) ■ Ordering data Order No.

Type ASIsafe Laserscanner SIMATIC FS620I ASIsafe 3SF78 34-6DD00
laser scanner
Optics
Including LS4soft software for
Rotation angle 190 ° securing danger zones
Angle resolution 0.36 ° SIMATIC FS660I ASIsafe 3SF78 34-6DE00
Lateral tolerance laser scanner with
vertical security
• without assembly system (for rear ± 0.18 °
of enclosure) Including LS4soft software for
securing danger zones, danger
• with assembly system (for mount- ± 0.22 ° points and access protection
ing surface)
Scan rate 25 scans/s or 40 ms/scan
Laser protection class
• to standard EN 60825-1, class 1 (eye safe)
Wave length 905 nm
Beam divergence 2 mrad
Time Base 100 s
Environment and material Accessories
Degree of protection IP65 Assembly system, 3RG78 38-1AA
hinged for easy adjustment
Ambient temperature
• Operation 0 ... +50 °C
• Storage -20 ... +60 °C
Enclosure insulation class Protection class 2
Humidity To DIN 40040, table 10,

Dimensions (W × H × D) in mm
code E (fairly dry)
141 × 167 × 168
6
Adapter plate for 3RG78 38-1AB
Weight 2.25 kg PLS mounting support
Emitter Infrared laser diode (λ = 905 nm) Cleaning set 3RG78 38-7RS
Casing Cast aluminum, plastic, Includes cleaning fluid (1000 ml),
steel connection plate cloths (x 100)
Vibratory load over 3 axes to 10 ... 150 Hz, max. 5 g Connectors and cables
IEC 60068, part 2-6 PC connection cable for 3RG78 38-1DC
Continuous shock over 3 axes to 10 g, 16 ms AS-Interface and PROFIBUS
IEC 60068, part 2-29 laser scanner
Rotating mirror drive Brushless DC motor Includes plug (9-pin)
and optical interface
Rotating mirror bearing Maintenance-free ball bearing
M12 jumper plug 3RG78 38-1DF
AS-Interface (suitable for protection field 1)
• ID code B M12 adapter 3RG78 38-1DG
• I/O code 0 (four data bits as outputs) For AS-Interface and
power supply
• Slave address Programmed by user in the range
1 ... 31 (on delivery = 0) M12 laser scanner –
M12 adapter connection cable
• Cycle time in accordance with 5 ms
AS-Interface specification • 5-pin, 1 m 3RG78 38-1EA
• Profile Reliable slave • 5-pin, 2 m 3RG78 38-1EB

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/71

 AS-Interface
ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner
ASIsafe laser scanner

■ Dimensions
ASIsafe laser scanner

122.3
61
R 2.6 Top view

approx. 220
a

s
143.8

167
148
b a b

48.75
R 2.6

130 64
5

approx. 140 132 a = rotating mirror axis

approx. 168 b = scan plane

Assembly system 3RG78 38-1AA

56,6
23

6
155,4
51,5
74,4
90

9
NSC 00610

158
9°
166
192

■ Schematics
X5

X1 X2 X3 X4
X1 AS-Interface connection (Bus connction and 24 Volt power supply)
X2 AS-Interface connection for address programming device
X3 Connection protective fields switchover
X4 Connection restart button
X5 Optical PC Interface

6/72 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 142-2

■ Overview AS-Interface Master

■ Application
The CP 142-2 enables the connection of the distributed I/O
system ET 200X to AS-Interface.
This module can be used to activate up to 31 AS-Interface
slaves and, if bi-directional slaves are implemented, up to
248 binary components.
Up to 6 CP 142-2 can be operated on the ET 200X.

■ Design
• 16 byte inputs and 16 byte outputs are used in the address
space of the ET 200X
• Operating statuses displayed by LEDs in the frontplate
• Display of the connected and activated slaves and their
operational readiness by LEDs
• One pushbutton for switching the operating status, entering
the existing configuration and switching the display
• Connection of the AS-Interface cable to M12 connector
• Master connection for the ET 200X distributed I/O station to • Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface cable
AS-Interface over a 12-pin connector
• Easy operation in the I/O address area of SIMATIC ET 200X ■ Function
• No CP configuration required for AS-Interface The CP 142-2 can be used in two operating modes:
• Activation of up to 31 AS-Interface slaves in accordance • Standard mode with BM 141/BM 142/BM 147
with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 • A maximum of 124 input bits and output bits of the
• Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped AS-Interface slaves can be addressed.
cable • Extended mode with BM 147
• Significant increase in the number of inputs and outputs of
ET 200X
An FC (Function Call) enables master calls to be used in
accordance with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 (e.g.
6
write parameters). The calls are described in the manual.
■ Benefits Program examples are supplied with the manual.

PROFIBUS
ET 200X
with CP 142-2
• In connection with the BM 147, the ET 200X enables PLC
functionality in degree of protection IP65
• Can also be used in a rugged industrial environment without
additional casing due to the high degree of protection IP67

G_IK10_XX_20013
• More flexible and extended application options of the ET 200X
thanks to considerable increase in available inputs/outputs
• Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of
AS-Interface
a button
• Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault
through LED displays: Example configuration
- status of the AS-Interface network
- connected slaves and their operational readiness Configuration
- monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level Parameterization of the CP 142-2 is performed with the STEP 7
basic package V2.1 and higher. No additional configuration is
required for AS-Interface.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/73

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 142-2

■ Technical specifications ■ Ordering data Order No.

Order No. 6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0 CP 142-2 communications 6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0
processor
Product type description CP 142-2
for connection of the
Interfaces SIMATIC ET 200X to AS-Interface
Version of electrical connection of M12 connector on the front panel Electronic manuals 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
the AS-Interface
Communication systems,
Supply voltage protocols, products on CD-ROM,
Supply voltage 24 V German/English
from electronic / encoder supply Free download in the Internet
voltage of the ET 200X (1L+) http://support.automation.
Supply voltage according to AS-Interface siemens.com/WW/view/de/
from the AS-Interface cable specification V2.0 10805930/133300

Current consumption
• from supply voltage 24 V DC, max. 60 mA
• from AS-Interface cable, max. 100 mA
Effective power loss
Effective power loss 2W
Permitted ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
• during operation 0 … +55 °C
• during storage -40 … +70 °C
• during transport -40 … +70 °C
Maximum relative humidity at 25 °C 95%
during operation

6 Design, dimensions and weight

Module format Expansion module
in ET200X design
Width 87 mm
Height 110 mm
Depth 63 mm
Net weight 310 g
Degree of protection IP66/67
Standards and specifications
Version V 2.0
of the AS-Interface specification
Product function
• AS-Interface with BM 141/BM 142 Yes 1)
• AS-Interface with BM 147 and Yes
FC, ASI-3422
Bus cycle time of the AS-Interface 5 ms
with 31 slaves
Configuration
Type of configuration of the Via key on the front panel
AS-Interface
Performance data
Data volume
• of the address area of the inputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the outputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC
1) I/O transmission only

6/74 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 243-2

■ Overview ■ Application
The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master connection exclusively
for the CPUs 22x of the innovated SIMATIC S7-200 generation.
By connecting to AS-Interface, the available digital inputs and
outputs for S7-200 are significantly increased (max. 248 DI /
186 DO on AS-Interface per CP).
In addition, the integrated analog value processing also makes
analog values (per CP max. 31 analog slaves, each with up to
4 channels) available to the S7-200 at the AS-Interface. Up to
two CP 243-2s can be operated simultaneously on the S7-200.

■ Design
The CP 243-2 is connected to the S7-200 like an expansion
module. It features:
• Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable
• LEDs in the front panel for displaying the operating status and
the operational readiness of all connected and activated
slaves
The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master for the innovated • Two pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the
generation of SIMATIC S7-200. The communications processor slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the ex-
(6GK1 243-2AX01-0AX0) supports the extended AS-Interface isting ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration
specification V2.1 and has the following functions:
• Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and inte- ■ Function
grated analog value transfer (according to the extended The CP 243-2 supports all of the specified functions of the ex-
AS-Interface specification V2.1) panded AS-Interface specification V2.1. This makes it possible
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with to operate up to 62 digital slaves or 31 analog slaves on the
the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1 AS-Interface by means of duplicate address assignment (A-B).
• Status displays for operating states and display of the func- Access to the analog values is just as easy as accessing the 6
tional readiness of connected slaves with LEDs in the front digital values thanks to the integrated analog value processing.
panel
In the process image of the S7-200, the CP 243-2 occupies a
• Indication of errors (incl. AS-Interface voltage errors, digital input byte (status byte), a digital output byte (control
configuration errors) with LEDs in the front panel byte), 8 analog input words and 8 analog output words. This
• Compact enclosure designed to match the new generation of means that the CP 243-2 occupies two (logical) slots. Using the
SIMATIC S7-200. status byte and the control byte, the mode of the 243-2 can be
set in the user program.
■ Benefits Depending on the mode, the CP 243-2 saves either the digital or
analog I/O data of the AS-Interface slaves or diagnostic values
in the analog address space of the S7-200 or allows the master
calls (e.g. changes to the slave addresses).
Configuration
• More flexible and extended application options of the
SIMATIC S7-200 due to the considerable increase in the All of the connected AS-Interface slaves are configured by
available digital and analog inputs/outputs the press of a button. No further configuration of the CP is
necessary.
• Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of
a button
• In the event of a fault, shorter standstill and service times due
to LED indication of:
• Status of the CPs
- connected slaves and their operational readiness
- monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/75

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 243-2

■ Technical specifications ■ Ordering data Order No.

Order No. 6GK7 243-2AX01-0XA0 CP 243-2 communications 6GK7 243-2AX01-0XA0
processor
Product type description CP 243-2
for connection of the
Interfaces SIMATIC S7-200 to AS-Interface
Version of electrical connection of Terminal connection Electronic manuals 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
the AS-Interface
Communication systems,
Supply voltage protocols, products on CD-ROM,
Supply voltage from backplane bus 5V German/English
Current consumption Free download in Internet at
http://support.automation.
• from 5 V DC backplane bus, max. 220 mA siemens.com/WW/view/com/
10805930/133300
• from AS-Interface cable, max. 100 mA
Effective power loss
Effective power loss 2W
Permitted
ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
• when installed vertically
- during operation 0 … 45 °C
• when installed horizontally
- during operation 0 … 55 °C
Ambient temperature -40 … +70 °C
during storage
Ambient temperature -40 … +70 °C
during transport

6 Maximum relative humidity at 25 °C

during operation
95%

Design, dimensions and weight

Module format Expansion module in
S7-200 design
Width 71 mm
Height 80 mm 1)
Depth 62 mm
Net weight 250 g
Number of slots required 1
Standards and specifications
Version V 2.1
of the AS-Interface specification
Bus cycle time of the AS-Interface
• with 31 slaves 5 ms
• with 62 slaves 10 ms
Performance data
Data volume
• of the address area of the analog 16 byte
inputs as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the analog 16 byte
outputs as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the digital 1 byte
inputs as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the digital 1 byte
outputs as allocation in the PLC
1) Height +16 mm with holes for wall fixing

6/76 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 343-2

■ Overview ■ Application
The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master connection for SIMATIC
S7-300 and ET 200M. The connection to the AS-Interface per-
mits a maximum of 248 DI/248 DO to be accessed for each CP.
The integrated analog value processing also enables analog
signals to be evaluated very easily (max. 62 analog slaves each
with max. 4 channels per CP, or max. 2 channels in the case of
A/B analog slaves).

■ Design
The CP 343-2 is connected to the S7-300 like an expansion
module. It features:
• Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable
• LEDs in the frontplate for displaying the operating status and
the operational readiness of all connected and activated
slaves
• Pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the
slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the ex-
The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master for the SIMATIC S7-300 isting ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration
PLC and the ET 200M distributed I/O device. The communica-
tions processor has the following functions: ■ Function
• Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and inte- The CP 343-2 supports all of the specified functions of the AS-
grated analog value transfer (according to the AS-Interface Interface specification V3.0. This makes it possible to operate up
specification V3.0) to 62 digital or analog slaves on the AS-Interface by means of
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with extended address assignment (A/B). The integrated analog
the AS-Interface specification V3.0 value processing allows easy access to the analog values.
• Status displays of the operating statuses and display of the
operational readiness of connected slaves with LEDs on the
The CP 343-2 occupies 16 byte each in the I/O address space
of the SIMATIC S7-300. In this space, the digital I/O data of the 6
front panel standard or A-slaves are stored. The I/O data of the B-slaves and
• Error displays (such as AS-Interface voltage errors, configura- the analog I/O data can be accessed using the S7 system func-
tion errors) with LEDs on the front plate tions for reading/writing data sets.
• Compact enclosure in SIMATIC S7-300 design A- and B-slaves are slaves in accordance with the AS-Interface
specification V2.1 or V3.0.
■ Benefits If necessary, master calls can be performed using the command
interface FC ASI_3422, e.g. read/write parameter, read/write
configuration. The FC, including STEP 7 sample program, can
be downloaded from the Internet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/com/5581657
• Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of
a button Configuration
• Flexible decentralized topologies can be constructed by us- All of the connected AS-Interface slaves are configured by
ing this communications processor in the ET 200M DP slave. the press of a button. No further configuration of the CP is
necessary.
• Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault
through LED displays:
- status of the AS-Interface network
- connected slaves and their operational readiness
- monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level
• Reduced costs for spare parts inventories because the CP
can be used in both the SIMATIC S7-300 and in ET 200M.
• Ideal for complex applications through the connection option
of 62 slaves and integrated analog value processing

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/77

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 343-2

■ Technical specifications ■ Ordering data Order No.

Order No. 6GK7 343-2AH01-0XA0 CP 343-2 communications 6GK7 343-2AH01-0XA0
processor
Product type description CP 343-2
for the connection of
Interfaces SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to
Version of electrical connection of S7-300 front connector AS-Interface; configuration of the
the AS-Interface with terminal connection AS-i network by means of
SET-key; including manual on
Supply voltage CD-ROM (German, English,
Supply voltage from backplane bus 5V French, Spanish, Italian);
without front panel connector
Current consumption
Front connector 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
• from 5 V DC backplane bus, max. 200 mA
20-pin, with screw contacts
• from AS-Interface cable, max. 100 mA
Electronic manuals 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
Effective power loss
Communication systems,
Effective power loss 2W protocols, products
on CD-ROM, German/English
Permitted
Free download in the Internet
ambient conditions
http://support.automation.
Ambient temperature siemens.com/WW/view/com/
10805930/133300
• during operation 0 … +60 °C
• during storage -40 … +70 °C
• during transport -40 … +70 °C
Maximum relative humidity at 25 °C 95%
during operation
Design, dimensions and weight
Module format S7-300 design

6 Width
Height
40 mm
125 mm
Depth 120 mm
Net weight 190 g
Number of slots required 1
Standards and specifications
Version V 3.0
of the AS-Interface specification
Bus cycle time of the AS-Interface
• with 31 slaves 5 ms
• with 62 slaves 10 ms
Performance data
Data volume
• of the address area of the inputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the outputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC

6/78 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 343-2 P

■ Overview ■ Application
The CP 343-2 P is the AS-Interface master connection for
SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. The connection to the AS-Inter-
face permits a maximum of 248 DI/248 DO to be accessed for
each CP.
The integrated analog value processing also enables analog
signals to be evaluated very easily (per CP max. 62 analog
slaves each with max. 4 channels or max. 2 channels in the case
of A/B analog slaves).
The CP 342-2 functionality is identical to that of the CP 343-2 P,
which means that an existing S7 user program can be used with-
out any restrictions with the new CP. The AS-Interface configura-
tion can also be downloaded/uploaded with the STEP 7 hard-
ware configuration.

■ Design
The CP 343-2 P is connected to the S7-300 like an expansion
module. It features:
• Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable
The CP 343-2 P is the AS-Interface master for the SIMATIC
S7-300 PLC and the ET 200M distributed I/O device. The com- • LEDs in the frontplate for displaying the operating status and
munications processor has the following functions: operational readiness of all connected and activated slaves
• Supports the configuration of the AS-Interface network • Pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the
with STEP 7, V5.2 and later slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the ex-
isting ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration
• Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and inte-
grated analog value transfer (according to the AS-Interface
specification V3.0) ■ Function
• Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with
the AS-Interface specification V3.0
The CP 343-2 P supports all of the specified functions of the AS-
Interface specification V3.0. This makes it possible to operate up 6
• Error displays (such as AS-Interface voltage errors, configura- to 62 digital or analog slaves on the AS-Interface by means of
tion errors) with LEDs on the front plate extended address assignment (A/B). The integrated analog
value processing allows easy access to the analog values.
• Compact enclosure in SIMATIC S7-300 design
The CP 343-2 P occupies 16 byte each in the I/O address space
■ Benefits of the SIMATIC S7-300. In this space, the digital I/O data of the
standard or A-slaves are stored. The digital I/O data of the B-
slaves and the analog I/O data can be accessed using the
S7 system functions for reading/writing data sets.
A- and B-slaves are slaves in accordance with the AS-Interface
specification V2.1 or V3.0.
• Improved plant documentation and support for servicing
thanks to documentation of the AS-Interface configuration in If necessary, master calls can be performed using the command
the STEP 7 project interface FC ASI_3422, e.g. read/write parameter, read/write
• Diagnosis of the AS-Interface network is supported configuration. The FC, including STEP 7 sample program, can
be downloaded from the Internet at
• Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/com/5581657
a button
• Flexible decentralized topologies can be constructed by us- Configuration
ing this communications processor in the ET 200M DP slave.
All of the connected AS-Interface slaves are configured by the
• Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault press of a button. No further configuration of the CP is neces-
through LED displays: sary.
- status of the AS-Interface network
- connected slaves and their operational readiness The CP 343-2 P also supports the configuration of the AS-
- monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level Interface network with STEP 7, V5.2. and later. The specification
• Reduced costs for spare parts inventories because the CP of the AS-i configuration in HW-Config simplifies the setting of
can be used in both the SIMATIC S7-300 and in ET 200M. slave parameters and the documentation of the plant. In partic-
ular, Siemens AS-Interface slaves can be conveniently config-
• Ideal for complex applications through the connection option ured by means of the slave selection dialog. It is even possible
of 62 slaves and integrated analog value processing to upload the actual configuration of an AS-Interface network
that has already been set up. The stored configuration cannot
be overwritten at the touch of a button and is therefore secure
against manipulation.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/79

 AS-Interface Master
Master for SIMATIC S7
CP 343-2 P

■ Technical specifications ■ Ordering data Order No.

Order No. 6GK7 343-2AH11-0XA0 CP 343-2 P communications 6GK7 343-2AH11-0XA0
processor
Product type description CP 343-2 P
for the connection of
Interfaces SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to
Version of electrical connection of S7-300 front connector AS-Interface; configuration of the
the AS-Interface with terminal connection AS-i network by means of SET-key
or via STEP 7 (V5.2 or higher);
Supply voltage including manual on CD-ROM
Supply voltage from backplane bus 5V (German, English, French,
Spanish, Italian);
Current consumption without front panel connector
• from 5 V DC backplane bus, max. 200 mA Front connector 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
• from AS-Interface cable, max. 100 mA 20-pin, with screw contacts
Effective power loss Electronic manuals 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
Effective power loss 2W Communication systems,
protocols, products on CD-ROM,
Permitted
German/English
ambient conditions
Free download in Internet at
Ambient temperature http://support.automation.
• during operation 0 … 60 °C siemens.com/WW/view/com/
10805930/133300
• during storage -40 … +70 °C
• during transport -40 … +70 °C
Maximum relative humidity at 25 °C 95%
during operation
Design, dimensions and weight
Module format S7-300 design

6 Width
Height
40 mm
125 mm
Depth 120 mm
Net weight 190 g
Number of slots required 1
Standards and specifications
Version V 3.0
of the AS-Interface specification
Bus cycle time of the AS-Interface
• with 31 slaves 5 ms
• with 62 slaves 10 ms
Performance data
Data volume
• of the address area of the inputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC
• of the address area of the outputs 16 byte
as allocation in the PLC
Configuration
Configuration software Yes
included in scope of delivery
of STEP 7 V5.2 or higher

6/80 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Master
Network transitions
Notes

■ Overview
AS-Interface links can be found in Section 8 – Network transitions
Industrial Ethernet – AS-Interface transition PROFIBUS DP – AS-Interface transition

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

DP/AS-i F-Link

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/81

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Introduction

■ Overview AS-Interface Slaves

K60 K20
Three coordinated series of AS-Interface compact modules with
digital and analog compact modules and a high degree of pro-
tection are available for operation in the field:
• Series K60 (digital and analog)
• Series K45 (digital)
• Series K20 (digital)
All compact modules are characterized by particularly simple
6 handling. The K60 and K45 modules are mounted with a mount-
ing plate. The mounting plate is used to receive the AS-Interface
flat cables and enables mounting on a wall or standard mounting
rail.
The K20 modules are directly mounted without a mounting plate
and connected to the AS-Interface using a round cable.

K45

Overview of digital compact modules

The following table provides an overview of the important fea-
tures of the digital compact modules. For exact details, see the
section Technical specifications in the chapter on the respective
product.

Version K60 K45 K20

8 inputs/ 2 outputs ✓ -- --
8 inputs ✓ -- --
4 inputs/ 4 outputs ✓ ✓ ✓
4 inputs/ 3 outputs ✓ -- --
4 inputs/ 2 outputs ✓ -- --
4 inputs ✓ ✓ ✓
2 inputs/ 2 outputs -- ✓ ✓
4 outputs ✓ ✓ ✓
3 outputs -- ✓ --
AS-Interface connection Flat cable / round cable Flat cable Round cable
I/O connection method M12 M12 / M8 M12 / M8
Pin assignment Standard / Y-II / Y Standard / Y Standard / Y
Degree of protection IP65/IP67/IP68/IP69K IP65/IP67 IP65/IP67
ATEX 3D (Zone 22) ✓ -- --
Extended address mode ✓ ✓ ✓

✓ Available -- Not available

6/82 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Overview
The K60 digital AS-Interface compact modules are character- Please note that these modules can be used only with a new
ized by optimized handling characteristics and user-friendli- master according to AS-i specification 3.0 (e.g.the new DP/
ness. They permit the mounting times and start-up times of the AS-i LINK Advanced or IE/AS-i LINK PN IO) and that the cycle
AS-Interface to be reduced by up to 40 %. times for the outputs can extend to max. 20 ms.
Assembly of the K60 modules is performed with a mounting K60 data couplers
plate which accommodates the AS-Interface shaped cables.
Two different mounting plates are offered for An AS-Interface data coupler has been added to the K60 com-
pact module range. Integrated in this module are two AS-i slaves
• Wall mounting which are connected to two different AS-i networks. Each of the
• Standard rail mounting two integrated slaves has 4 virtual inputs and four virtual out-
puts. The bidirectional data transmission of 4 data bits between
Addressing of the K60 modules is performed using an address- two AS-i networks is thus possible in a simple and cost-effective
ing socket integrated in the compact module. The addresses manner. The data coupler need its own address in each AS-i net-
can also be assigned after installed. work.
K60 compact modules with a maximum of four digital inputs Each AS-i network works with a different cycle time depending
and outputs on the number of stations. Hence two AS-i networks are not nec-
These compact modules contain the communication electronics essarily synchronous. For this reason the AS-i data coupler can
and the M12 standard connections for inputs and outputs. Using be used to transmit only standard data and no safe data.
M12 standard connectors, a maximum of four sensors and four K60 compact modules for use in hazardous areas (ATEX)
actuators can be simply and reliably connected to the compact
module. Two versions of the K60 modules are available for operation in
Zone 22 hazardous areas according to Classification II 3D
The mounting plate and the compact module are joined together (dusty atmosphere, non-conductive dust). The version with four
by means of a screw, with simultaneous contacting of the inputs and four outputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D T75 °C
AS-Interface cable by the service-proven insulation piercing IP65X and the version with four inputs has the designation (Ex)
method. II 3D T60 °C IP65X.
K60 compact modules with a maximum of eight digital Special conditions have to be observed for the safe operation of
inputs these devices. In particular the module must be protected by
These modules have eight digital inputs for connection through
M12 plugs.
suitable protective measures from mechanical damage. Other
conditions for safe operation, see section Technical specifica-
6
tions in the Technical Information LV 1 T.
The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing
all eight inputs. As with every compact module, the addressing
can be performed through a double addressing socket.
K60 compact modules with a four digital inputs and outputs
according to AS-Interface specification 3.0
The new AS-i specification 3.0 adds a number of completely new
features to the AS-Interface bus system. The extended address
mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to 62 slaves
on one AS-i network. With the extended address mode accord-
ing to specification 3.0, 4 outputs are now possible even with A/B
slaves (instead of only 3 outputs possible up to now with speci-
fication 2.1). Hence with full expansion of an AS-i network, there
are now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-i
system. Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves
according to specification 3.0 are also available as K60 com-
pact modules.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/83

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60
• PNP transistor
• Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA
• Connection method: M12
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Type Current carrying Slave type Pin assignment
capacity of outputs
8 inputs/2 outputs 2A A/B Special 3RK2 400-1HQ00-0AA3
3RK1 400-1DQ00-0AA3
8 inputs -- Standard Y-II 3RK1 200-0DQ00-0AA3
-- A/B Y-II 3RK2 200-0DQ00-0AA3
4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2A Standard Y-II 3RK1 400-1DQ00-0AA3
2A Standard Standard 3RK1 400-1CQ00-0AA3
1A Standard Y-II 3RK1 400-1DQ01-0AA3
1A Standard Standard 3RK1 400-1DQ03-0AA3
2A A/B slave (Spec. 3.0) Y-II 3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3
4 inputs/ 3 outputs 2A A/B Y-II 3RK2 400-1FQ03-0AA3
4 inputs/ 2 outputs 2A Standard Y-II 3RK1 400-1MQ00-0AA3
4 inputs -- Standard Y-II 3RK1 200-0CQ00-0AA3
2x2 inputs / 2x2 outputs 1 A Standard Y 3RK1 400-1DQ02-0AA3
4 outputs 2A Standard Y-II 3RK1 100-1CQ00-0AA3
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K60

6 Version ATEX (Ex) II 3D IP65 X

• PNP transistor
• Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA
• Connection method: M12
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Type Current carrying Slave type Pin assignment
capacity of outputs
4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2A Standard Y-II 3RK1 400-1DQ05-0AA3
4 inputs -- Standard Y-II 3RK1 200-0CQ05-0AA3
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K60 data couplers
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Type Current carrying Slave type Pin assignment
capacity of outputs
Data coupler 4 inputs / -- Standard 3RK1 408-8SQ00-0AA3
4 outputs (virtual)
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
suitable for all K60 compact modules
• Wall mounting 3RK1 901-0CA00
• Standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-0CB01
3RK1 901-0CA00
AS-Interface sealing caps M12 3RK1 901-1KA00
for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00
AS-Interface sealing caps M12, tamper-proof 3RK1 901-1KA01
for free M12 sockets
3RK1 901-1KA01
Sealing sets 3RK1 902-0AR00
• For K60 mounting plate and standard distributor
3RK1 902-0AR00
• Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
• One set contains one straight and one shaped seal

6/84 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K - K60R

■ Overview
Connection

3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0 (5.0 m)

3RX8 000-0CE42-1AF0 (5.0 m)
NSA0_00339c

K60R K60R K60R

3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.5 m)

3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)

Modules with degree of protection IP67 cannot be used in areas

exposed to permanently high levels of humidity, in applications Distributor
with drilling emulsions and cutting oils or when cleaning with
high-pressure cleaners. The answer for these applications is 3RK1 901-1TR00
provided by the expansion of the K60 compact modules with the
K60R module with degree of protection IP68/IP69K.
The K60R modules are connected instead of the AS-Interface
flat cable using a round cable with M12 cable box. IP67
The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage
6
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.5 m)
supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable. 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
Degree of protection IP68 permits many new applications, which 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0 (5.0 m)1)
were impossible with the former field modules with degree of 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0 (5.0 m)1)
protection IP67. In applications such as filling plants or machine-
tools the K60R with degree of protection IP68 enables the mod- 1) plus connector 3RX8 000-0CD45
ule to be used directly in zones exposed to permanent loading IP68 or 3RX8 000-0CE45
by humidity. It is thus possible to make even more rigorous
savings in wiring with AS-Interface. The IP68 test conditions can K60R connection options
be found in the section "IP68/IP69K tests".
In the IP67 environment the service-proven standard compo-
Cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, such as is regularly nents are connected using flat cables. Spur lines are laid into the
performed in the food drinks industry for instance, is possible IP68 environment by means of an AS-Interface M12 feeder
without difficulty (IP69K). (3RK1 901-1NR..). The module is connected with a round cable
In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the to an M12 cable box. For this purpose the module has an M12
AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K60R module bus connection instead of the former addressing socket. The
there is a round cable connection for direct connection to a AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are
round cable. No adapter is required. routed together in a 4-pole round cable. There must be no
ground conductor in this round cable. Connection to ground is
Mounting made through the mounting plate.
The same mounting plates are used as for the K60 modules. In- In the IP68 environment only cables with extruded M12 plugs
stead of using flat cables the K60R is connected using a 4-pole may be used. These cables are available preassembled as an
round cable with an M12 connection. With the K60R the mount- M12 cable plug/cable box version:
ing plate thus serves only as a fixture and ground terminal. • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6: 0.5 m long
Addressing • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0: 1.0 m long
Addressing is performed using the same socket as for the bus • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5: 1.5 m long
connection. Connecting the module to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 To connect the distributor and the K60R module over long dis-
addressing unit is performed using a standard M12 cable tances it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with
(e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5). If the older version of the an M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with
3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is used, a special addressing an M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45,
cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required. When the mounting is fin- 3RX8 000-0CE45 angle plug) and connected to the distributor.
ished, the module is connected with the addressing cable to the This cable is available in two versions:
addressing unit and addressed. The addressing cable is then
removed and the module connected to the bus cable. • 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box
• 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box
To connect more than one K60R module to one spur line,
the spur line can be split again using a T distributor
(3RK1 901-1TR00) with degree of protection IP68.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/85

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K - K60R

■ Overview (continued)
Please note the following boundary conditions: IP68/IP69K tests
• The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface apply. For all K60R modules were tested with the following tests:
M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible current is
limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to • Stricter test than IP67:
just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K60R modules, the afore- 90 min in 1.8 m depth of water
mentioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur (IP67: 30 min at 1 m depth of water)
lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic resistance • Salt water test:
(approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account. Five months in salt water, 20 cm deep, at room
• For round cable connections with shared AS-i and UAUX in a temperature
single cable, the following maximum lengths apply: • Test with particularly creepable oil:
- per spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m Five months completely under oil at room temperature
- total of all round cable segments in an AS-Interface network: • Test with drilling emulsion:
maximum 20 m Five months at room temperature (components of the drilling
emulsion: Anionic and non-ionic emulsifiers, paraffinic low-
aromatic mineral oil, boric acid alkanolamines, corrosion
inhibitors, oil content 40 %)
• Test in oil bath (Excelence 416 oil) with alternating oil bath
temperature:
130 cycles of 15 °C to 55 °C, two months
• Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner according to IP69K:
80 bar to 100 bar, 10 cm to 15 cm distance, time per side
> 30 sec, water temperature 80 °C
To simulate requirements as realistically as possible the modules
were artificially aged prior to the tests by 15 temperature cycles
of -25/+85 °C. During the test the modules were connected to
3RX1 connecting cables. Unassigned connections were closed
with 3RK1 901-1KA00 sealing caps.

6 Note:
Sealing caps and M12 connections must be tightened with the
correct torque.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K - K60R 3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3
• 4 inputs/ 4 outputs
• IP68/IP69K
• Standard assignment
• Current carrying capacity:
• 200 mA (inputs)
• 2 A (outputs)
• Standard slave
3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
Suitable for all K60 and K60R compact modules
• Wall mounting 3RK1 901-0CA00
• Standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-0CB01

3RK1 901-0CA00

AS-Interface sealing caps M12 3RK1 901-1KA00

for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00

6/86 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K - K60R

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
AS-Interface M12 feeders
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end
in feeder
AS-i / Uaux M12 socket -- not 3RK1 901-1NR20
available
M12 1m not 3RK1 901-1NR21
cable box available
3RK1 901-1NR21 3RK1 901-1NR22
2m not
available
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end
in feeder
AS-i / Uaux 4-fold M12 socket -- available 3RK1 901-1NR00
delivery includes
coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR00

M12-T distributors 3RK1 901-1TR00

• IP68
3RK1 901-1TR00 • 1 x M12 plug
• 2 x M12 box
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
6
M12 addressing cables to M12
• Standard M12 cable for addressing slaves with M12 connection,
e.g. K60R modules
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• When using the current version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit
• 1.5 m
Addressing cables, with banana plug, to M12 3RK1 901-3RA00
• For addressing slaves with M12 connection, e.g. K60R modules
• When using the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit

3RK1 901-3RA00

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/87

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K45

■ Overview
The K45 compact modules are the ideal supplement to the K60 Two mounting plates are offered for the K45 compact modules:
large compact modules, which have proven their worth in indus- • The mounting plate for wall mounting has a hole pattern that is
try. They are the logical consequence for rounding off the bottom identical to that of the K60 compact modules. This means that
end of the existing product range. K60 compact modules can be mounted together with K45
The acclaimed advantages of the existing K60 compact mod- modules in an aligned arrangement. The flat cables can be
ules are fully emulated by the much smaller K45 modules. Their inserted in the recesses of the mounting plates where they
footprint is the same as that of the user modules. However, they cause no hindrance.
have a mounting depth which is only two-thirds of the user mod- • The mounting plate for standard rail mounting has a hole
ule and hence an exact match for the compact module family. pattern that is identical to that of the user modules.
Yet in spite of these small dimensions all the modules have large Mounting the flat cables is now easier than ever. The yellow and
labels and an integrated addressing socket. black AS-Interface flat cable can be inserted into the mounting
plates from the left or right regardless of the position of the cod-
ing lug. The correct polarity of the applied voltages is always
guaranteed.
Sensors/actuators are connected using M12 sockets.
The 4E module can be ordered optionally with M8 connection
sockets.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K45
• PNP transistor
• Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA
• Modules supplied without mounting plate

6
3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3

Type Current Slave type Pin assignment Connection

carrying method
capacity of
outputs
4 inputs -- Standard Standard M12 3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3
-- Standard Standard M8 screw 3RK1 200-0CT20-0AA3
fitting
-- Standard Standard M8 snap 3RK1 200-0CU20-0AA3
fitting
-- A/B Standard M12 3RK2 200-0CQ20-0AA3
-- A/B Standard M8 screw 3RK2 200-0CT20-0AA3
fitting
-- A/B Standard M8 snap 3RK2 200-0CU20-0AA3
fitting
2 x 2 inputs -- A/B Y M12 3RK2 200-0CQ22-0AA3
1)
2 inputs/ 2 outputs 2A Standard Standard M12 3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3
2 x (1 input / 1 output) 0.2 A Standard Y M12 3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3
4 x (1 input / 1 output) 0.2 A A/B (Spec. 3.0) Y M12 3RK2 400-0GQ20-0AA3
3 outputs 1A A/B Standard M12 3RK2 100-1EQ20-0AA3
4 outputs 1A Standard Standard M12 3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3
2 outputs / 2 inputs 2A A/B Standard M12 3RK2 400-1BQ20-0AA3
1)
The typical current carrying capacity per output increases with version
"E12" from 1.5 to 2 A (available since approx. 07/2003).

6/88 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K45

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
Accessories
K45 mounting plates
• For wall mounting 3RK1 901-2EA00
• For standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-2DA00

3RK1 901-2EA00

AS-Interface sealing caps

• For free M12 sockets 3RK1 901-1KA00
• For free M8 sockets 3RK1 901-1PN00
3RK1 901-1KA00

3RK1 901-1PN00

Cable terminating pieces 3RK1 901-1MN00

For sealing of open cable ends
(shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67

3RK1 901-1MN00

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/89

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Overview ■ Design
Use in tight spaces Mounting

Mounting the K20 modules: On the front (see left) or on the side
The K20 compact module range rounds off the AS-Interface (see right)
compact modules with a particularly slim design and a width of
a mere 20 mm. Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions, The K20 modules are mounted with two screws. No mounting
these modules are particularly suited for handling machine ap- plate is required. The modules can be mounted either on the
plications in the field of production engineering where modules front or the side. This flexibility allows users to place them where
need to be arranged in the smallest of spaces. they will be best protected and save the most space, e. g. on
Robotics is yet another application area. Instead of the AS-Inter- standard mounting rails.

6 face flat cable, the K20 modules are connected to AS-Interface

over a round cable with M12 cable box.
Addressing
The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power
supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable. This 3RK1 904-2AB01
enables extremely compact installation.
AS-Interface: 1 ... 31 (1A ... 31B)
The flexibility of the round cable means that it can also be 3 2
used on moving machine parts without any problems. The
K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as their non-
encapsulated design makes them particularly light in weight. 4 1

In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing

the AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. In this case, the
K20 modules support direct connection to the round cable. No
flat to round cable adapter is required.
The K20 compact module range includes standard AS-Interface ASi- ASi+ ASi- ASi+
modules, as well as an ASIsafe version for the connection of fail- 3 1 3 4 1
safe sensors, such as EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons or pro-
tective door monitoring. All standard AS-Interface K20 modules
NSA0_00443a

support, as far as technically possible, the expanded address

mode (A/B addresses) according to AS-Interface specification
2.1, which enables connection of 62 stations to an AS-Interface
network. The K20 module with four inputs and four outputs works
in expanded address mode according to AS-Interface specifica- 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0
tion 3.0 which, for the first time, supports four outputs with an 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
A/B slave, thus enabling 248 inputs and 248 outputs in a fully
expanded AS-Interface network.
Addressing the K20 modules
For particularly space-saving dimensions, the sensors and actu-
ators are connected over M8 plug-in connectors. Alternatively, Addressing the K20 modules is performed using the same
M12 connectors with Y assignment can be used. socket as for the bus connection. The module is connected
to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit using a standard M12
connecting cable (2- or 3-pole), e. g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5.
If the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is
used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required
for connecting to the addressing unit. When the addressing
operation is completed, the addressing cable is removed again
and the module connected to the bus cable. Never use a 4-pole
or 5-pole connecting cable for the addressing.

6/90 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Design (continued)
All K20 modules (except ASIsafe versions) support, as far as A new series of AS-Interface distributors and M12 feeders
technically possible, the extended address mode and can be is available for easy connection of the K20 modules to the
addressed with an A or B address. Up to 62 slaves can be con- AS-Interface flat cable:
nected accordingly to one AS-Interface network. The version
with four inputs and four outputs (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) works AS-Interface distributors
according to the new AS-Interface specification 3.0. With Like the AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN00 standard distributor, the
specification 3.0 even A/B slaves can have four outputs (instead new AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN10 compact distributor enables
of only three possible up to now with specification 2.1). Please the AS-Interface flat cable to be distributed to several lines. The
note, however, that these modules can be used only with a new compact distributor can be used for a current carrying capacity
master according to AS-Interface specification 3.0 (e.g. the new up to 6 A. It is characterized by particularly simple handling.
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced) and that the cycle times for the outputs • Insert the cable
can extend to max. 20 ms.
• Swing shut and
Connection • Secure in the closed position with only one captive screw.
No additional seals are required for the compact distributor. The
AS-Interface flat cable must always be routed through the com-
pact distributor, i.e. you must never terminate it in the compact
distributor. For higher currents or for when one of the two flat
cables has to be terminated in the distributor, use the standard
distributor.
AS-Interface M12 feeders
AS-Interface M12 feeders are available in the same design as
the compact distributor. These versions are required for transi-
tion from the AS-Interface flat cable to a round cable. The spec-
trum covers AS-Interface M12 feeders with various cable
lengths (1 and 2 m) and distinguishes between M12 feeders for
AS-i/Uaux for connecting I/O modules or AS-Interface without
Uaux for connecting modules with inputs. These AS-Interface
M12 feeders are just as easy to use as the AS-Interface compact
distributor. The flat cable must always be routed through the
6
M12 distributors, i. e. you must never terminate it in the M12
distributors. For cases requiring the AS-Interface flat cable to be
AS-Interface M12 feeders and distributor, closed terminated in the M12 feeder, use the standard M12 feeder
(3RX9 801-0AA00) or the quadruple M12 feeder
(3RK1 901-1NR00).

AS-Interface M12 feeders and distributor, open

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/91

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Design (continued)
The various options for connecting the K20 modules to the
AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are
presented in the following table:

Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20

AS-i without Uaux AS-i / Uaux
4DI, M8 2DI/2DO, M8
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3
4DI, M12 2DI/2DO, M12
3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3
2FDI, M12 4DI/4DO, M8
3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 3RK1 400-1CT30-0AA3
3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3
K20 module
• Plus M12 feeder with integrally extruded cable
NSA0_00445a

NSA0_00446a
M12 feeder: M12 feeder:
3RK1 901-1NR11 (1 m) or 3RK1 901-1NR21 (1 m) or
3RK1 901-1NR12 (2 m) 3RK1 901-1NR22 (2 m)
K20 module
• Plus M12 feeder with socket
NSA0_00447a

NSA0_00448a
• Plus separate M12 cable

6
M12 feeder: M12 feeder:
3RX9 801-0AA00 3RK1 901-1NR20
3RK1 901-1NR10
M12 cable: M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
K20 module
• Plus quadruple M12 feeder
NSA0_00449a

NSA0_00450a

• Plus separate M12 cable

M12 feeder: M12 feeder:

3RK1 901-1NR00 3RK1 901-1NR00
M12 cable: M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)

To connect the feeder and the K20 module over distances This cable is available in two versions:
> 2 m it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with an • 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box
M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with an
M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45, angled: • 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box
3RX8 000-0CE45) and connected to the feeder. To connect more than one K20 module to one spur line, the spur
line can be split again using a T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00).

6/92 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Design (continued)
Please note the following boundary conditions: • For round cable connections with shared AS-i and Uaux in a
• The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface apply. For all single cable, the following maximum lengths apply:
M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible current is - per spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m
limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to - total of all round cable segments in an AS-Interface network:
just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K20 modules, the afore- maximum 20 m
mentioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur
lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic resistance
(approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account.
NSA0_00451a

≤5 m

≤ 1,5 m

≤5m

Connection using Connection using Further distribution Connection using

4-fold M12 feeder M12 feeder using MT-12 T feeder M12 feeder
(3RK1 901-1NR00) (3RK1 901-1NR2.) (3RK1 901-1TR00) (3RK1 901-1NR1.)
(AS-i/Uaux) (AS-i/Uaux) (AS-i without Uaux)
for I/O modules for I/O modules for modules with inputs

Connection examples for K20 modules

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/93

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Digital I/O module, IP67 – K20
Type Current Slave type Pin Connection
carrying assignment method
capacity of
outputs
4 inputs -- A/B Standard M8 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3
-- A/B Y M12 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3
2 inputs/ 1 A/B Standard M8 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 2 outputs
1 A/B Y M12 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3
4 outputs 1 A/B (Spec. 3.0) Standard M8 3RK2 100-1CT30-0AA3
4 inputs/ 1 Standard Standard M8 3RK1 400-1CT30-0AA3
4 outputs
1 A/B (Spec. 3.0) Standard M8 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3
2 safe inputs -- Standard Y-II M12 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3

■ Accessories
Version Order No.
AS-Interface sealing caps
• For free M12 sockets 3RK1 901-1KA00
• For free M8 sockets 3RK1 901-1PN00
3RK1 901-1KA00

6
3RK1 901-1PN00
AS-Interface standard distributors, for AS-Interface flat cables
• Current carrying capacity up to 7 A 3RK1 901-1NN00
• Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and standard rail mounting
• Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable is to be terminated in the
distributor and must be ordered separately

3RK1 901-1NN00
AS-Interface compact distributors, for AS-Interface flat cables 3RK1 901-1NN10
Current carrying capacity up to 6 A

3RK1 901-1NN10

6/94 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20

■ Accessories (continued)
Version Order No.
AS-Interface M12 feeders
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end in
feeder
3RX9 801-0AA00 AS-i M12 socket -- Available 3RX9 801-0AA00
AS-Interface M12 feeders
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end in
feeder
3RK1 901-1NR10 AS-i M12 socket -- Not available 3RK1 901-1NR10
AS-i M12 cable box 1m Not available 3RK1 901-1NR11
AS-i M12 cable box 2m Not available 3RK1 901-1NR12

3RK1 901-1NR11
AS-i / Uaux M12 socket -- Not available 3RK1 901-1NR20
AS-i / Uaux M12 cable box 1m Not available 3RK1 901-1NR21
AS-i / Uaux M12 cable box 2m Not available 3RK1 901-1NR22

3RK1 901-1NR21
6
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end in
feeder
AS-i / Uaux 4-fold M12 socket -- Available 3RK1 901-1NR00
delivery includes
coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR00
M12-T distributors 3RK1 901-1TR00
• IP68
3RK1 901-1TR00 • 1 x M12 plug
• 2 x M12 box
M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
For connection of two sensors to one M12 socket with Y connector

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
M12 addressing cables to M12 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• Standard M12 cable for addressing slaves with M12 connection,
e.g. K20 modules
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 • When using the current version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit
• 1.5 m
Addressing cables, with banana plug, to M12 3RK1 901-3RA00
• For addressing slaves with M12 connection,
e.g. K20 modules
• When using the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit

3RK1 901-3RA00

For plug-in connectors and cables, see Catalog FS 10

--> "Proximity Switches / Accessories / Plug-in Connectors"
or look on the Internet at www.siemens.com/as-interface.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/95

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - user modules

■ Overview
The AS-Interface user modules are the first module generation Advantages of the K45 compact modules
for AS-Interface. Today, innovated and further improved mod-
ules are available in the form of the K45 and K60 series of The K45 compact modules provide extra advantages in addition
compact modules. We recommend replacing the user modules to the functionality of the user modules:
in future with the K45 compact module series. However, the user • An integrated addressing socket enables the module to be
modules are still available for existing systems and replacement addressed in the installed state
requirements. • Time is saved when mounting the module: Mounting with only
More information can be found at one screw thanks to hinge system
http://mall.ad.siemens.com • Extensive diagnostics by LED on the module (e.g. display
of zero address, no communication with master, overload)
• Random insertion of the AS-Interface flat cable irrespective
of the position of the profiled lug
• Smaller dimensions
• Versions with M12 and M8 connection sockets enable the
direct connection of all sensors
• Modules in A/B technology enable up to 62 slaves on one
AS-Interface network
Conversion table for user modules --> K45
User module Corresponding K45 type
Order No. Version Order No. Version
3RG9 001-0AA00 4 inputs (100 mA) 3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3 4 inputs (200 mA)
3RG9 001-0AG00 4 inputs (200 mA) 3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3 4 inputs (200 mA)
3RG9 001-0AH00 2 x 2 inputs 3RK2 200-0CQ22-0AA3 2 x 2 inputs
A/B slave

6
3RG9 001-0AC00 2 inputs / 2 outputs 3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3 2 inputs / 2 outputs
relay outputs solid-state outputs
3RG9 001-0CC00 2 inputs / 2 outputs 3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3 2 inputs / 2 outputs
solid-state outputs solid-state outputs
3RG9 001-0AM00 2 inputs / 2 outputs 3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3 2 inputs / 2 outputs
solid-state outputs solid-state outputs
UAux using M12 plug UAux using black flat cable
3RG9 001-0AJ00 2 x (1 input / 1 output) 3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3 2 x (1 input / 1 output)
supply of I/O from supply of I/O from
AS-Interface cable AS-Interface cable
3RG9 001-0AB00 4 outputs 3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3 4 inputs
relay outputs solid-state outputs
3RG9 001-0AL00 4 outputs 3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3 4 outputs
UAux using M12 plug UAux using black flat cable
3RG9 001-0CB00 4 inputs 3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3 4 inputs
solid-state outputs solid-state outputs

Note:
To use the K45 modules you require the 3RK1 901-2EA00
(wall mounting) or 3RK1 901-2DA00 (standard rail mounting)
K45 mounting plates instead of the 3RG9 010-0AA00 and
3RG9 030-0AA00 coupling modules.

6/96 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Overview ■ Benefits
• Analog modules are just as easy to integrate in AS-Interface
as digital modules
• Analog values can be easily detected and issued locally
• Preprocessing of the analog value transmission in the master
enables rapid evaluation of the analog values
• Up to four values can be detected using one analog module
• Faster transmission and conversion of analog values thanks to
the new option for changing over to single-channel operation
In addition, Specification 3.0 now also offers:
• A/B technology, now also with analog modules
• On average, double fast transmission times
(only 3 or 4 cycles, depending on the resolution selected)
• Variable adjustable mode: 12-bit or 14-bit resolution,
1- or 2-channel, selectable over the ID1 code
• Extra simple handling of analog processing with masters of
Specification 3.0, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

AS-Interface analog modules from the K60 compact series

detect or issue analog signals locally. These modules are linked
to the higher-level controller through an AS-Interface master
according to specification 2.1 or specification 3.0.
The analog modules are divided into five groups:
• Input module for sensors with current signal
• Input module for sensors with voltage signal
• Input module for sensors with thermal resistor
• Output module for current actuators 6
• Output module for voltage actuators
The input modules according to Profile 7.3/7.4 are available with
two or four input channels. It is possible in addition to convert the
two-channel module to using only one input channel, thus en-
abling very short times before the analog value is available. The
conversion is effected by means of a jumper plug at socket 3.
The transmission times achieved with analog modules accord-
ing to Profile 7.A.9 are half shorter by half than those achieved
with Profile 7.3/7.4. Operation is adjustable in this case, e.g.it is
possible to choose with the ID1 Code whether the module is
operated with one or two channels.
The output modules are configured as two-channel modules as
standard.
The input and output channels are electrically isolated from the
AS-Interface network. If sensors with a higher power require-
ment are to be connected, more power can be supplied through
the auxiliary voltage as an alternative to the internal supply.
In the manual the modules are presented in great detail along
with their technical specifications and in-depth notes on opera-
tion. Sample function blocks round off the manual.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/97

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Function
Data transfer according to analog profile 7.3/7.4

One User program

cycle with
system
function call Conversion
Seven
AS-Interface AS-Interface
CPU Analog module Analog value
Master cycles
(max. 5 ms each)

G_NSA0_XX_00181
Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59
integrated standard function blocks

With analog profile 7.3/7.4 at least seven AS-Interface cycles The analog value transmission applies in reverse order for the
must be passed through before transmission is completed. This output modules as well.
requires the use of a master according to extended specification
V2.1. In total this results in the following maximum times before the
analog value is available with profile 7.3/7.41):
With input modules the complete analog value is then available
1 channel 2 channels 4 channels
in the AS-Interface master. Preprocessing is thus performed in
the master. Conversion and Max. 95 ms Max. 235 ms Max. 435 ms

6 With the next system function call the user program brings the
analog value as one value into the user program. Hence the
transmission time
1) With presetting: smoothing function deactivated; line filter 50 Hz
analog value is very quickly updated.

Data transfer according to analog profile 7.A.9

One user program

cycle with
system
function call Conversion
Three or four *
AS-Interface AS-Interface
CPU Analog module Analog value
Master cycles
(max. 5 ms or
10 ms each** )
G_NSA0_XX_00436

* depending on resolution with 12 or 14 bit

** with A/B technology

With analog profile 7.A.9, only three or four AS-Interface cycles

are needed for the transmission. This requires the use of a mas-
ter according to specification 3.0.
• Maximum times before the analog value is available with pro-
file 7.A.9 are offered in the manual with full details according
to the mode selected (resolution, number of channels,
A/B technology)

6/98 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Analog I/O modules IP67 - K60,
analog profile 7.3
• Slave type: Standard
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Inputs Type Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or 3RK1 207-1BQ40-0AA3
(selectable by jumper ±20 mA (selectable)
plug to socket 3)
Voltage ±10 V or 3RK1 207-2BQ40-0AA3
3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3 1 ... 5 V (selectable)
Thermal resistor Pt 100 or 3RK1 207-3BQ40-0AA3
Ni 100 or
0 ... 600 Ω (selectable)
4 inputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or 3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3
±20 mA (selectable)
Voltage ±10 V or 3RK1 207-2BQ44-0AA3
1 ... 5 V (selectable)
Thermal resistor Pt 100 or 3RK1 207-3BQ44-0AA3
Ni 100 or
0 ... 600 Ω (selectable)
Outputs Type Output range
2 outputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or 3RK1 107-1BQ40-0AA3
for 2-wire actuators ±20 mA or 0 ... 20 mA
(selectable)
Voltage ±10 V or 3RK1 107-2BQ40-0AA3
for 2-wire actuators 0 ... 10 V or

Analog I/O module IP67 - K60, analog profile 7.A.9

1 ... 5 V (selectable)
6
• Slave type: A/B (Spec. 3.0)
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Inputs Type Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or 3RK2 207-1BQ50-0AA3
(variably adjustable) ±20 mA (selectable)
Voltage ±10 V or 3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3
1 ... 5 V (selectable)
3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/99

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O modules for operation in the field
Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
Accessories
Manuals, German
Only available to download in the Internet::
http://www.siemens.com/automation/manuals

K60 mounting plates

• Wall mounting 3RK1 901-0CA00
• Standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-0CB01

3RK1 901-0CA00
M12 sealing cap 3RK1 901-1KA00

3RK1 901-1KA00
Sealing sets 3RK1 902-0AR00
• For mounting plate K60 and distributor
• Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
3RK1 902-0AR00 • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal
Jumper plugs 3RK1 901-1AA00
6 3RK1 901-1AA00
For changing over the 2-channel input modules

More information can be found at:

http://mall.ad.siemens.com

6/100 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O Modules for Operation in the Control Cabinet, IP20
Introduction

■ Overview

SlimLine S22.5/S45 Flat module

For AS-Interface applications inside control cabinets there are
various module series for the most diverse requirements:
• SlimLine S22.5
• SlimLine S45
• F90 module
• Flat module

6
All modules of these series can be snap-mounted directly on
a standard mounting rail or be fastened using screws.
AS-Interface modules in IP20 have direct terminals for the
AS-Interface cables and therefore do not require a base.

F90 module

Series Spectrum Mounting on 35 mm Wall mounting using Other possibilities

standard mounting rail push-in lugs
according to EN 50022 (Order No.: 3RP1 903)
SlimLine S22.5 • 4I (standard and A/B modules) ✓ ✓ --
• 4O
• 2I/2O (steady-state/relay outputs)
• Counters1)
• Ground-fault detection module1)
SlimLine S45 • 4I/4O (steady-state/relay outputs) ✓ ✓ --
• 4I/4O with floating I/Os
• 4I/3O (A/B modules)
• 4I/4O (A/B modules Spec. 3.0)
F90 module • 4I/4O (screw terminal connection) ✓ -- --
• 4I/4O (connection using Combicon
connector)
• 16I
Flat module • 4I/4O (screw terminal connection) -- -- Integrated lugs for
screw fixing
1)
More information about these modules:
see "Modules with Special Functions"

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/101

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O Modules for Operation in the Control Cabinet, IP20
SlimLine

■ Overview
SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series
The AS-Interface series of modules for the "SlimLine" control An addressing socket integrated at the front enables the module
cabinet with degree of protection IP20 creates space in the to be addressed also when it is installed.
cabinet and in distributed local boxes.
In addition to the digital input/output modules there are modules
For these modules the priority was placed on a narrow type of of design S22.5 with special functions. These include:
construction. They have a width of only 22.5 or 45 mm.
• Counter module
Standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface cable can be
connected using screw-type or spring-loaded terminals. • Ground-fault detection module

Integrated adapters enable mounting on a standard mounting More information about these modules, see
rail. Disassembly from the standard mounting rail is quick and • Catalog LV 1, chapter "Systems" --> section "AS-Interface"
easy and requires no tools. --> "Slaves" --> "Modules with Special Functions"
With an additional accessory (push-in lugs), the modules can • A&D Mall: Section "Low-Voltage Controls"
also be screwed on. --> "SIRIUS Industrial Controls" --> "Systems"
--> "AS-Interface" --> "Slaves"
All modules are fitted at the front with LEDs which indicate the --> "Modules with Special Functions"
module's status.
The new AS-Interface specification 3.0 adds a number of com-
pletely new features to AS-Interface bus system. The extended
address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to
62 slaves on one AS-Interface network. With the extended ad-
dress mode according to specification 3.0, four outputs are now
possible for the first time even with A/B slaves (instead of only
three outputs possible up to now with specification 2.1). Hence
with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are now
248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-Interface
system.
Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves accord-
6 ing to specification 3.0 are also available as SlimLine module
S45.
Note:
Please note that the modules according to Specification 3.0
can be used only with a new master according to AS-Interface
Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO) and that the cycle times for the outputs
can extend to max. 20 ms.

6/102 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O Modules for Operation in the Control Cabinet, IP20
SlimLine

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
S22.5 SlimLine modules
Inputs: PNP transistor
Type Connecting Slave type Inputs Outputs
terminals
4 inputs Screw Standard 2-wire -- 3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2
Standard 2- and 3- -- 3RK1 200-0CE02-0AA2
conductors
A/B slave 2- and 3- -- 3RK2 200-0CE02-0AA2
3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2 conductors
Spring Standard 2-wire -- 3RK1 200-0CG00-0AA2
Standard 2- and 3- -- 3RK1 200-0CG02-0AA2
conductors
A/B slave 2- and 3- -- 3RK2 200-0CG02-0AA2
conductors
2 inputs/ Screw Standard 2-wire PNP transistor 2 A 3RK1 400-0BE00-0AA2
2 outputs
Standard 2-wire Relays 3RK1 402-0BE00-0AA2
Spring Standard 2-wire PNP transistor 2 A 3RK1 400-0BG00-0AA2
Standard 2-wire Relays 3RK1 402-0BG00-0AA2
4 outputs Screw Standard -- PNP transistor 1 A 3RK1 100-1CE00-0AA2
Spring Standard -- PNP transistor 1 A 3RK1 100-1CG00-0AA2
S45 SlimLine modules
Inputs: PNP transistor
Type Connecting Slave type
terminals
Inputs Outputs
6
4 inputs/ Screw Standard 2- and 3- PNP transistor 1 A 3RK1 400-1CE00-0AA2
4 outputs conductors
Standard 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK1 400-1CE01-0AA2
conductors
3RK1 400-1CE00-0AA2 Standard 2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 3RK1 402-3CE01-0AA2
floating 1 A floating
Standard 2- and 3- Relays 3RK1 402-3CE00-0AA2
conductors
A/B (Spec. 3.0) 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2
conductors
Spring Standard 2- and 3- PNP transistor 1 A 3RK1 400-1CG00-0AA2
conductors
Standard 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK1 400-1CG01-0AA2
conductors
Standard 2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 1 A 3RK1 402-3CG01-0AA2
floating floating
Standard 2- and 3- Relays 3RK1 402-3CG00-0AA2
conductors
A/B (Spec. 3.0) 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK2 400-1CG01-0AA2
conductors
4 inputs/ Screw A/B slave 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK2 400-1FE00-0AA2
3 outputs conductors
Spring A/B slave 2- and 3- PNP transistor 2 A 3RK2 400-1FG00-0AA2
conductors
Accessories
Sealable cover 3RP1 902
To secure against unauthorized addressing
Push-in lugs 3RP1 903
For screw fixing

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/103

 AS-Interface Slaves
I/O Modules for Operation in the Control Cabinet, IP20
F90 module

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
F90 module
Standard slave
Type Connection Inputs Outputs
terminals
4 inputs/ Screw 2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 1A 3RG9 002-0DB00
4 outputs PNP transistor
2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 2A 3RG9 002-0DA00
3RG9 002-0DB00 PNP transistor
2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 2A 3RG9 002-0DC00
PNP transistor
floating
Combicon 2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 1A 3RG9 004-0DB00
PNP transistor
2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 2A 3RG9 004-0DA00
PNP transistor
2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 2A 3RG9 004-0DC00
PNP transistor
floating
16 inputs Screw PNP transistor -- 3RG9 002-0DE00
Combicon PNP transistor -- 3RG9 004-0DE00
Accessories
Combicon connector sets 3RX9 810-0AA00
• For 4I/4O modules with Combicon connection
One set comprises:

6 • 4 x 5-pole plug for connection

• Standard sensors/actuators
• 2 x 4-pole plug for AS-Interface and external auxiliary voltage

Flat module

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Flat module 3RK1 400-0CE00-0AA3
• 4 inputs/ 4 outputs
• 200 mA for all I/Os
• Screw terminals

3RK1 400-0CE00-0AA3

6/104 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Special integrated solutions
AS-Interface communication modules

■ Overview
3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3 AS-Interface communication module 3RG9 005-0SA00 AS-Interface communication module for
for printed-circuit board installation printed-circuit board installation

+
aux
NC NC
+ +
IN1 IN1
OUT1 OUT1
0 0
IN2 IN2
OUT2 OUT2
0 0
IN3 IN3
OUT3 OUT3
0 0
IN4 IN4
OUT4 OUT4
0 0
+ +
PROG
ASI– ASI-
ASI+ ASI+
NSA0_00078a
NSA0_00080a

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is
possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or
indicator lights to be operated, the necessary energy being pro- indicator lights to be operated, the power for inputs and outputs
vided by the AS-Interface system (yellow AS-Interface cable). being provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is
Note:
connected to Uaux + and (NC) to Uaux -, the outputs are not
short-circuit and overload resistant; if Uaux - is connected to (0), 6
If the switching outputs are overloaded, the module does not the outputs are overload and short-circuit resistant (maximum
respond to invoking by a master. summation current 200 mA). In this case the module does not re-
spond even to invoking by a master when the switching outputs
3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3 AS-Interface communication module are overloaded.
for printed-circuit board installation

+
aux
NC
+
IN1
OUT1
0
IN2
OUT2
0
IN3
OUT3
0
IN4
OUT4
0
+

ASI–
ASI+

NSA0_00079a

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is

possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or
indicator lights to be operated, the necessary energy for the
inputs and outputs being provided from the auxiliary voltage
(24 V PELV). If (+) is connected to Uaux + and (NC) to Uaux -, the
outputs are not short-circuit and overload resistant; if Uaux - is
connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit
resistant (maximum summation current 200 mA). In this case the
module does not respond even to invoking by a master when the
switching outputs are overloaded.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/105

 AS-Interface Slaves
Special integrated solutions
AS-Interface communication modules

■ Overview (continued)
3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2, 3RK2 400-1FD00-0AA2 AS-Interface 3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2 AS-Interface communication module
communication module for printed-circuit board installation for printed-circuit board installation
Connection Connection pad1) Connection Connection pad1)
AS-i + 27, 29 AS-i + 27, 29
AS-i - 28, 30 AS-i - 28, 30
Sensor+ 17, 18, 23, 24 Sensor+ 17, 18, 23, 24
Sensor- 13, 14, 19, 20 Sensor- 13, 14, 19, 20
IN1 21 IN1 21
IN2 22 IN2 22
IN3 15 IN3 15
IN4 16 IN4 16
Uaux + (L24+) 2, 4 Not assigned 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 25, 26
Uaux - (M24) 1, 3 1)
Note: Pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings in Catalog LV1 T
OUT1 9 "Technical Information".

OUT2 10 With the 4I module for printed-circuit board mounting it is

possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-conductor
OUT3 5 sensors to be connected, the power for inputs being provided
OUT4 6 (not assigned for 4E/3A module from AS-Interface cable.
3RK2 400-1FD00-0AA2)
Mounting is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board
OUT- 7, 8 Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and
Not assigned 11, 12, 25, 26 horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
1) • 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP):
Note: Pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings in Catalog LV1 T
"Technical Information". Order No. 530843-2

6 With the 4E/4A or 4E/3A module for printed-circuit board

mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts or
• 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
Order No. 650118-1
3-conductor sensors according to IEC 947-5-2 to be connected. If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
Up to four indicator lights via the 4E/4A module or up to three not respond to invoking by a master.
indicator lights via the 4E/3A module can also be controlled. The
power for short-circuit resistant solid-state switching outputs is
provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV).
Mounting is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board
Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and
horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
• 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP):
Order No. 530843-2
• 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
Order No. 650118-1
If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
not respond to invoking by a master.

6/106 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Special integrated solutions
AS-Interface communication modules

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Slave type Order No.
4 inputs / 4 outputs
• Supply of I/Os using AS-Interface cable (max. 200 mA) Standard 3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3
- Printed-circuit board with solder pins, protected by enclosure
• Supply of I/Os using external auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV)
- Printed-circuit board with solder pins, Standard 3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3
protected by enclosure
- Printed-circuit board with solder pins for horizontal mounting Standard 3RG9 005-0SA00
• Supply of outputs using external auxiliary voltage Standard 3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2
3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3 (24 V PELV)
- Printed-circuit board with gold-plated direct connector for
30-pole male connector socket for simple installation with
direct connector
4 inputs / 3 outputs A/B 3RK2 400-1FD00-0AA2
• Supply of outputs using external auxiliary voltage
(24 V PELV)
- Printed-circuit board with gold-plated direct connector for
30-pole male connector socket for simple installation with
direct connector
3RG9 005-0SA00 4 inputs Standard 3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2
• Printed-circuit board with gold-plated direct connector for 30-pole
male connector socket for simple installation with direct connector

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/107

 AS-Interface Slaves
Modules with special functions
Counter modules

■ Overview
This module is used to send hexadecimal coded count values If the time criterion stipulated in the graphic is violated, the count
(LSB=D0, MSB=D3) to a higher-level controller. The count value value is rejected.
is increased by one for each valid count pulse at terminal 8.
Beginning at 0, the module counts up to 15 and then begins The counter is active only for the reset parameter P2 (default).
again at 0. The controller adopts the current value and deter- The counter is deleted when P2 is set, and the incoming count
mines the number of pulses between two host invocations pulses are not registered until after P2 is reset again.
through subtraction from the previous value. The total number Note:
of count pulses is determined by adding these differences. A customized function block is necessary or must be
For the values sent to be unambiguous, no more than 15 count programmed.
values are allowed between two host invocations or AS-Interface
master invocations at terminal 8. The maximum permissible
transmission frequency is calculated from these times: ASi+ ASi-

fTRmax = 15 / Tmax
Terminal 4: Bus connection ASi+
Tmax : max. possible transmission time from the slave to the host ASi Terminal 5: Bus connection ASi-
Terminal 6: unused
Another condition for the maximum frequency is the pulse ADDR

shaped required. For the counter to accept a pulse as valid, a

Low must have been applied at the input for at least 300 µs and
a High for at least 1 ms. This results in a controller-independent
maximum frequency of
IN1
fZmax = 1 / 1.3 ms = 769 Hz for the counter module
(see following graphic). Terminal 7: Sensor supply+
Terminal 8: Counter input
Terminal 9: Sensor supply-

NSA0_00085
+ IN1 -

6 7 IN 1
Connection options

N S A 0 0 0 8 4

³ 1 m s ³ 3 0 0 s J

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
• Counter module
• With screw terminal connection 3RK1 200-0CE03-0AA2
• With spring-loaded terminal connection 3RK1 200-0CG03-0AA2

3RK1 200-0CE03-0AA2

3RK1 200-0CG03-0AA2

6/108 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Modules with special functions
Ground-fault detection modules

■ Overview
"... Ground faults in control circuits must not result in a machine's The following ground faults are detected:
unintentional starting or hazardous movements, nor must they • Ground fault from AS-i "+"
prevent it from stopping (EN 60204, Part 1 or DIN VDE 0113)."
• Ground fault from AS-i "-"
The AS-Interface ground-fault detection module is used to meet • Ground fault from sensors and actuators which are supplied
these requirements. Using this module from the SlimLine series, from the AS-Interface voltage.
ground faults in AS-Interface systems can be reliably detected
and reported. One module per AS-Interface network is required.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Ground-fault detection module
• With screw terminal connection 3RK1 408-8KE00-0AA2
• With spring-loaded terminal connection 3RK1 408-8KG00-0AA2

3RK1 408-8KE00-0AA2

Overvoltage protection module

■ Overview 6
The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects Rated discharge current Isn
downstream AS-Interface devices or individual sections in
AS-Interface networks from conducted overvoltages which can The rated discharge current is the peak value of a surge current
be caused by switching operations and remote lightning strikes. with waveform 8/20 microseconds, for which the overvoltage
protection module is rated in according to a specific test pro-
The location of the overvoltage protection module forms within gram.
the lightning protection zone concept the transition from zone 1
to 2/3. Direct lightning strikes must be coped with using addi- With waveform 8/20, 100 % of the value is achieved after
tional protective measures at the transitions from lightning pro- 8 microseconds and 50 % after 20 microseconds.
tection zone 0A to 1. Protection level Up
With the AS-Interface overvoltage protection module it is now The protection level of an overvoltage protection module is the
also possible to integrate AS-Interface in the overall lightning highest momentary value of the voltage at the terminals, estab-
protection concept of a plant or machine. lished in individual tests.
The module has the same design, connection and degree of The protection level characterizes the capability of an overvolt-
protection (IP67) as the AS-Interface user modules. It is a age protection module to limit overvoltages to a residual level.
passive module without AS-i IC and as such does not need its
own address on the AS-Interface network. Accessories
Connection to an AS-Interface system is effected through the An FK-E (3RG9030-0AA00) or PG-E (3RG9240-0AA00) coupling
FK-E or PG-E coupling module. Through use of the EEMS inter- module is required for connection of the AS-Interface cable and
face, the AS-Interface cable and the auxiliary voltage cable can the auxiliary power supply cable.
be protected from overvoltage.
Overvoltages are discharged through a ground cable with a
green/yellow oil-proof outer sheath. This cable is fixed in the
module and must be connected with low resistance to the
system's ground.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/109

 AS-Interface Slaves
Modules with special functions
Modules with special functions
Overvoltage protection module
Configuration guidelines

AS- AS- NSA0_00093a

OVP Inter- Inter-
face face

Device without ground terminal

Application Application → Grounding of the mounting plate

Device with Mounting plate

ground terminal

OVP = Overvoltage protection

Configuration guidelines for overvoltage protection module

The grounding of protection modules and the units to be pro- (equipotential bonding). If insulated devices are protected,
tected must be effected through a shared grounding point their mounts must be included in the grounding points.
Sample application

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 1

AS- AS- AS- AS-

OVP Inter- Inter- Inter- Inter- OVP
face face face face
A B

6 protected range

Equipotential bonding NSA0_00092a

(system earth)
Protection approx. 0.5m to the left

Protection approx. 5m to the right OVP = Overvoltage protection

Sample application for overvoltage protection module

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Overvoltage protection module 3RK1 901-1GA00

3RK1 901-1GA00

6/110 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
General data

■ Overview
3RA6 fuseless compact feeders and infeed system for 3RA6 Screw and spring-loaded connections
Integrated functionality The SIRIUS compact feeders and the SIRIUS infeed system for
3RA6 are available with screw and spring-type connections.
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders are a generation of innova-
tive load feeders with the integrated functionality of a circuit System configurator for engineering
breaker, contactor and solid-state overload relay. In addition,
various functions of optional mountable accessories A free system configurator is available to reduce further the
(e.g. auxiliary switches, surge suppressors) are already inte- amount of engineering work for selecting the required compact
grated in the SIRIUS compact feeder. feeders and matching infeed.

Application Types of infeed for the 3RA6 fuseless compact feeders

The SIRIUS compact feeders can be used wherever standard On the whole four different infeed possibilities are available:
induction motors up to 32 A (approx. 15 kW/400 V) are directly • Parallel wiring
started. • Use of 3-phase busbars (combination with SIRIUS circuit
Low equipment variance breakers and SIRIUS contactors possible)
Thanks to wide setting ranges for the rated current and wide • 8US busbar adapters
voltage ranges, the equipment variance is greatly reduced • SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6
compared to conventional load feeders. To comply with the clearance and creepage distances
Very high operational safety demanded according to UL508 there are the following infeed
possibilities:
Through the high short-circuit breaking capacity and defined
shut-down when the end of service life is reached means that the Type of infeed Feeder terminal Order No.
SIRIUS compact feeder achieves a very high level of operational (according to UL 508,
safety that would otherwise have only been possible with consid- type E)
erable additional outlay. This sets it apart from devices with Parallel wiring Terminal for "Self- 3RV19 28-1H
similar functionality. Protected Combination
Motor Controller
Safe disconnection (Type E)"
The auxiliary switches of the 3RA6 compact feeders are de-
signed as mirror contacts. It is thus possible to use the devices
3-phase busbars 3-phase infeed
terminal for construct-
3RV19 25-5EB
6
for safe disconnection, e. g. emergency stops, up to Category 2 ing "Type E Starters",
(EN 954-1) and together with other redundancy switching de- UL 508
vices up to Category 3 or 4. Infeed systems for Infeed on left, 3RA68 13-8AB
3RA6 50/70 mm2, screw (screw terminals),
Communications integration through AS-Interface terminal with 3 sockets, 3RA68 13-8AC
To enable communications integration through AS-Interface outgoing terminal with (spring-loaded
screw/spring-loaded terminals)
there is an AS-i add-on module (also available as a version with connections,
two local inputs for safe disconnection) which can be mounted including PE bar
instead of the control circuit terminals on the SIRIUS compact
feeder.
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders
The design of the AS-i add-on module permits a group of up to
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders are universal motor feeders
62 feeders with a total of four cables to be connected to the con-
according to IEC/EN 60947-6-2. As control and protective
trol system. This reduces wiring work considerably compared to
switching devices (CPS) they can connect, convey and discon-
the parallel wiring method.
nect the thermal, dynamic and electrical loads from short-circuit
Permanent wiring / easy replacement currents up to Iq = 53 kA, i.e. they are practically weld-free. They
combine the functions of a circuit breaker, a contactor and a
Using the SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 it is possible to carry solid-state overload relay in a single enclosure and can be used
out the wiring in advance without a compact feeder needing to wherever standard induction motors up to 32 A (up to approx.
be connected. 15 kW at 400 V AC) are started directly. Direct-on-line and re-
A compact feeder is very easily replaced simply by pulling it out versing starters are available as variants.
of the device without disconnecting the wiring. The reversing starter version comes with not only an internal
Even with screw connections or mounting on a standard mounting electrical interlock but also with a mechanical interlock to prevent
rail there is no need to disconnect any wiring (on account of the simultaneous actuation of both directions of rotation.
removable main and control circuit terminals) in order to replace
a compact feeder.
Consistent solution from the infeed to the motor feeder
The SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 with integrated PE bar is
offered as a user-friendly possibility of feeding in summation
currents up to 100 A with a maximum conductor cross-section
of 70 mm² and connecting the motor cable directly without addi-
tional intermediate terminals.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/111

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
General data

■ Overview (continued) Four complement variants for 3RA6 compact feeders

• For standard mounting rail or screw fixing:
3RA6 fuseless compact feeders are available with 5 current basic version including 1 pair of main circuit
setting ranges and 3 control voltage ranges: terminals and control circuit terminals
Overall width Width Current set- At 400 V AC for • For standard mounting rail or screw fixing when using the AS-
of direct-on- reversing ting range induction motors i add-on module:
line starter starter up to without control circuit terminals because the AS-i add-on mod-
mm mm A kW ule is plugged on instead
45 90 0.1 ... 0.4 0.09 • For use with the infeed system for 3RA6:
without main circuit terminals because they are supplied with
45 90 0.32 ... 1.25 0.37 the infeed system and the expansion modules
45 90 1 ... 4 1.5 • For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and
45 90 3 ... 12 5.5 AS-i add-on module:
without terminal complement (also for reordering when replac-
45 90 8 ... 32 15 ing the compact feeder)
The 3 control voltage ranges are:
• 24 V AC/DC ■ Benefits
• 42 ... 70 V
• 110 ... 240 V The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders offer a number of advan-
tages, the most important being:
Note:
• Compact design saves space in the control cabinet
The 3RA1 load feeders can be used for fuseless load feeders • Little planning and assembly work and far less wiring thanks
> 32 A up to 100 A. to a single complete unit with one order number
The SENTRON 3VL circuit breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT
• Little variance through 3 wide voltage ranges and 5 wide set-
contactors can be used for fuseless load feeders >100 A.
ting ranges for the rated current mean low stock levels
For information, see the Catalogs LV 1 and LV 1 T.
• High plant availability through integrated functionalities such
Operating conditions as prevention of main contact welding and shut-down at end
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders are suitable for use in any of service life
climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms in which no • Greater productivity through automatic device reset in case of
6 severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors,
hazardous gases) prevail. Suitable covers must be provided for
overload and differentiated detection of overload and short-
circuit
installation in dusty and damp locations. • Easy checking of the wiring and testing of the motor direction
The SIRIUS compact feeders are generally designed to degree prior to start-up thanks to optional "control kits"
of protection IP20. The permissible ambient temperature during • Speedy replacement of devices thanks to removable termi-
operation is -20 ... +60°C. nals with spring-loaded and screw connections in the main
and control circuit
The operating short-circuit current based on IEC/EN 60947-6-2
is 53 kA at 400 V. • Efficient power distribution through the related SIRIUS infeed
system for 3RA6
Note:
• Direct connection of the motor feeder cable to the SIRIUS
Further technical specifications can be found in the system
infeed system for 3RA6 thanks to integrated PE bar
manual, stored at
http://www.siemens.de/kompaktabzweig • Connecting and looping through incoming feeders up to a
cross-section of 70 mm²
Overload tripping times
• When using the infeed system for 3RA6, possibility of directly
The overload tripping time can be set on the device to less than connecting the motor cable without intermediate terminals
10 s (CLASS 10) and less than 20 s (CLASS 20 for heavy start- • Integration in Totally Integrated Automation thanks to the
ing). As the breaker mechanism still remains closed after an optional connection to AS-Interface
overload, resetting is possible by either local manual reset or
autoreset after 3 minutes cooling time.
With autoreset there is no need to open the control cabinet.
Diagnostics options
The compact feeder provides the following diagnostics options:
• With LEDs:
- Connection to the control voltage
- Position of the main contacts.
• With mechanical indication:
- Tripping due to overload
- Tripping due to short-circuit
- Tripping due to malfunction (end of service life reached
because of worn switching contacts or a worn switching
mechanism or faults in the control electronics)
These states can be evaluated in addition in the higher-level
control system by means of the integrated auxiliary switches and
signal switches of the compact feeder.

6/112 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
3RA61 direct-on-line starters

■ Selection and ordering data

Direct start A set of 3RA69 40-0A adapters is
required for screw fixing.

NSB0_01946

3RA61 20-1CB32 3RA61 20-2EB32

Standard induction motor Setting range Compact feeder

4-pole at 400 V AC1) for solid-state overload release

Order No.
According to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 no welding of contactor contacts at Iq = 53 kA at 400 V
Standard output P
kW A
0.09 0.1 ... 0.4 3RA61 20- 7 A 7 3 7
0.37 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA61 20- 7 B 7 3 7
1.5 1 ... 4 3RA61 20- 7 C 7 3 7

6
5.5 3 ... 12 3RA61 20- 7 D 7 3 7
15 8 ... 32 3RA61 20- 7 E 7 3 7
Order No. supplement for connection type
• Without terminals for use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and the AS-i add-on module 0 0
• With screw terminals 1
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage
• 24 V AC/DC (for combining with AS-i add-on module) B
• 42 ... 70 V AC/DC E
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC P
Order No. supplement for complement variant
• For standard mounting rail or screw mounting: 2
Basic version including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals
• For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 3
without main circuit terminals (with control circuit terminals)
• For standard mounting rail or screw mounting when using 4
the AS-i add-on module without control circuit terminals (with main circuit terminals)
1)
Selection depends on the concrete startup and rated data of the protected
motor.
2) Delivery time is dependent on connection type, rated control supply
voltage and complement variant: temporarily C or X, later A or B.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/113

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
3RA62 reversing starters

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Reversing duty Two sets of
3RA69 40-0A adapters
are required for screw fixing.

NSB0_01947

3RA62 50-1CP32 3RA62 50-2DP32

Standard induction motor Setting range Compact feeder

4-pole at 400 V AC1) for solid-state overload release

Order No.
According to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 no welding of contactor contacts at Iq = 53 kA at 400 V
Standard output P
kW A
0.09 0.1 ...0.4 3RA62 50- 7 A 7 3 7
0.37 0.32 ... 1.25 3RA62 50- 7 B 7 3 7
1.5 1 ... 4 3RA62 50- 7 C 7 3 7
5.5 3 ... 12 3RA62 50- 7 D 7 3 7

6 15
Order No. supplement for connection type
8 ... 32 3RA62 50- 7 E 7 3 7

• Without terminals for use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and the AS-i add-on module 0 0
• With screw terminals 1
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage
• 24 V AC/DC (for combining with AS-i add-on module) B
• AC/DC 42 ... 70 V E
• AC/DC 110 ... 240 V P
Order No. supplement for complement variant
• For standard mounting rail or screw mounting: 2
Basic version including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals
• For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 3
without main circuit terminals (with control circuit terminals)
• For standard mounting rail or screw mounting when using 4
the AS-i add-on module without control circuit terminals (with main circuit terminals)
1) Selection depends on the concrete startup and rated data of the protected
motor.
2)
Delivery time is dependent on connection type, rated control supply
voltage and complement variant: temporarily C or X, later A or B.

6/114 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders / Accessories for
3RA6 direct-on-line and reversing starters

■ Overview
Accessories for SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
The following accessories are available specially for the 3RA6 The compact feeders are mounted directly with the aid of busbar
compact feeders: adapters on busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-center clear-
• AS-i add-on module: For communication of the compact ance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and
feeder with the control system using AS-Interface; also avail- costs. These feeders are suitable for copper busbars with a
able as a version with two local inputs for safe disconnection. width from 12 to 30 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm
The AS-i add-on module can be combined only in connection thick.
with compact feeders with a rated control supply voltage of The 8US busbar system can be loaded with a maximum summa-
24 V AC/DC. tion current of 630 A.
• Addressing unit for addressing the AS-i add-on module The "reversing starter" version requires a device holder along
• External auxiliary switch blocks: Snap-on auxiliary switch as side the busbar adapter for lateral mounting.
versions 2 NO, 2 NC and 1 NO +1 NC with screw or spring-
loaded connections; the contacts of the auxiliary switch block The compact feeders are snapped onto the adapter and con-
open and close jointly with the main contacts of the compact nected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged
feeder. The NC contacts are designed as mirror contacts. directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both
mechanically and electrically at the same time.
• Control kit: aid for manually closing the main contacts in order
to check the wiring and motor direction under conditions of For more accessories such as incoming and outgoing terminals,
short-circuit protection flat copper profiles etc., see LV1, Chapter 14, "8US Busbar
• Adapter for screw fixing the compact feeder, including Systems, 60 mm Busbar System".
push-in lugs Accessories for operation with closed control cabinet doors
• Main conductor terminal: Available with screw and Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for standard and
spring-loaded terminals emergency-stop applications are available for operating the
Accessories for parallel wiring compact feeder with closed control cabinet doors.
The terminal block for "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller", type E is available for complying with the clearance

6
and creepage distances demanded according to UL 508.
Accessories for infeed using 3-phase busbar systems
The 3-phase busbars can be used as an easy, time-saving and
clearly arranged means of feeding SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feed-
ers with screw connection. Circuit breaker sizes S00 and S0 can
also be integrated.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 devices. However,
any kind of extension up to a maximum summation current of
63 A is possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar
(rotated by 180°) underneath the terminals of the respective last
circuit breaker.
A connecting piece is required for the combination with circuit
breaker size S00. The motor starter protectors are supplied by
appropriate feeder terminals. Special feeder terminals are re-
quired for constructing "Type E Starters" according to UL/CSA.
The 3-phase busbar systems are finger-safe but empty connec-
tion tags must be fitted with covers. They are designed for any
short-circuit stress which can occur at the output side of con-
nected SIRIUS 3RA6 compact feeders or circuit breakers.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/115

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders / Accessories for
3RA6 direct-on-line and reversing starters

■ Selection and ordering data

Type Order No.
Accessories specially for 3RA6 compact feeders
AS-i add-on module for compact feeders 3RA69 70-3A
For communication of the compact feeder with the control system using AS-Interface

AS-i add-on module with two local 3RA69 70-3B

inputs for safe disconnection
3RA69 70-3A

Addressing units for AS-i add-on module 3RK19 04-2AB01

• For active AS-Interface modules, intelligent sensors and actuators
• According to AS-Interface Version 2.1
• Including expanded addressing mode
• Scope of supply
- 1 addressing unit
- 1 operating manual (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian)
- 1 addressing cable (1.5 m, with jack plug)
3RK19 04-2AB01
Control kit 3RA69 50-0A
For mechanical actuation of the
compact feeder

3RA69 50-0A
Adapters for screw fixing the 3RA69 40-0A

6 compact feeder
(set including push-in lugs
Direct-on-line starters require 1 set,
reversing starters 2 sets.

3RA69 40-0A
Accessories specially for 3RA6 compact feeders with screw connection
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact feeders
2 NO 3RA69 11-1A
2 NC 3RA69 12-1A
1 NO +1 NC 3RA69 13-1A
3RA6911-1A
Main circuit terminals 3RA69 20-1A
(incoming and outgoing side)

3RA6920-1A
Accessories specially for 3RA6 compact feeders with spring-loaded connection
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact feeders
2 NO 3RA69 11-2A
2 NC 3RA69 12-2A
1 NO + 1 NC 3RA69 13-2A
3RA6911-2A
Main circuit terminals 3RA69 20-2A
(incoming and outgoing side)

3RA6920-2A

6/116 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders / Accessories for
3RA6 direct-on-line and reversing starters

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
according to UL 508 for infeed through parallel wiring with compact feeders
Note: UL 508 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage distance at line side
for "Combination Motor Controller Type E".
Terminal blocks are not required for use according to CSA.
With size S0, these terminal blocks cannot be used in combination with
3RV19 .5 three-phase busbars.
3RV19 28-1H Terminal blocks type E 3RV19 28-1H
For extended clearance and creepage distances (1 and 2 inch)

Number of compact feeders Modular Rated current For motor Order No.
and circuit breakers spacing In at 690 V starter protec-
that can be connected tors Size
without lateral accessories
mm A
3-phase busbars for infeed with 3RA6
For feeding several compact feeders and/or circuit breakers with screw terminals,
mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated, with touch protection.
3RV19 15-1AB 2 45 63 S01) 3RV19 15-1AB
3 45 63 S01) 3RV19 15-1BB
4 45 63 S01) 3RV19 15-1CB
3RV19 15-1BB 5 45 63 S01) 3RV19 15-1DB

6
3RV19 15-1CB

3RV19 15-1DB
1) Not suitable for 3RV11 motor starter protectors with overload relay function.
Common clamping of S00 and S0 motor starter protectors is not possible,
due to the different modular spacings and terminal heights.
The 3RV19 15-5DB connecting piece is available for connecting the
compact feeders to circuit breakers size S00.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/117

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders / Accessories for
3RA6 direct-on-line and reversing starters

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Modular spacing For Order No.
motor starter protec-
tors Size
mm
Connecting piece for 3-phase busbars
For connecting compact feeders (left) 45 S00 3RV19 15-5DB
and circuit breakers size S00 (right)
3RV19 15-5DB
Covers for connection tags of the 3-phase busbars
Touch protection for empty positions S00, S0 3RV19 15-6AB

3RV19 15-6AB

Conductor cross-section For compact Order No.

feeders and
Solid or Finely stranded AWG cables, motor starter
stranded with end sleeve solid or stranded protector Size
mm² mm² AWG
3-phase feeder terminals for 3-phase busbars
Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 4 ... 16 12-4 S0 3RV19 25-5AB

3RV19 25-5AB
Connection from below1)
6 2.5 ... 25 4 ... 16 12-4 S00, S0 3RV19 15-5B

3RV19 15-5B
3-phase feeder terminals for constructing
"Type E Starters" according to UL 508 for 3-phase busbars
Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 4 ... 16 10-4 S0 3RV19 25-5EB
1)
This terminal is connected in place of a switch,
please take the space requirement into account.

6/118 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders / Accessories for
3RA6 direct-on-line and reversing starters

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
for flat copper profiles according to DIN 46433 8US12 11-1NS10
Width: 12 ... 30 mm
Thickness: 4 ... 5 mm or 10 mm
Device holders for lateral mounting along side the busbar adapter for 60 mm systems
Required in 8US12 50-1AA10
addition to the busbar adapter for mounting a reversing starter

Type Color of handle Version of Order No.

extension shaft
mm
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for operating the compact feeder with closed control cabinet doors
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver
and an extension shaft of 130/330 mm in length (5 mm x 5 mm).
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree
of protection IP65.
The door interlocking prevents accidental opening of the control cabinet door
in the ON position of the motor starter protector.
The OFF position can be locked with up to 3 padlocks.
Door-coupling rotary operating Black 130 3RV19 26-0B
mechanisms
3RV19 26-0B
EMERGENCY STOP Red/Yellow 130 3RV19 26-0C
door-coupling rotary operating
mechanisms

Version Size/Color Order No.

6
Tools for spring-loaded terminals
Screwdrivers
3.5 mm x 0.5 mm, Length approx. 175 mm; 8WA2 803
suitable for a max. conductor cross-section green
8WA2 803 of 2.5 mm2

Type Order No.

Documentation
System manual
• German: SIRIUS compact feeder and 3RA69 91-0A
accessories
• English: SIRIUS compact starter and 3RA69 92-0A
accessories

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/119

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Overview
The infeed system for 3RA6 compact feeders enables far less In addition, the integrated PE bar means it is optionally possible
wiring in the main circuit and, thanks to the easy exchangeability to connect the motor cable directly to the infeed system without
of the compact feeders, reduces the usual downtimes for main- additional intermediate terminals. The infeed system for 3RA6
tenance work during the plant's operating phase. compact feeders is designed for summation currents up to
100 A with a maximum max. 70 mm² conductor cross-section
The infeed system provides the possibility of completely prewir- on the feeder terminal block.
ing the main circuit without a compact feeder needing to be con-
nected at the same time. As the result of the removable terminals The infeed system can be mounted on a standard mounting rail
in the main circuit, compact feeders can be integrated in an in- or flat surfaces.
feed system in easy manner (without the use of tools).

5 9

6
11

NSB0_01878

12 7

10

$ Feeder terminal + PE pick-off

% Three-socket expansion module , Connecting plates
& Two-socket expansion module - End covers
( Expansion plug . 45 mm adapter for SIRIUS motor starter protector size S0
) PE infeeds / 3RA61 direct-on-line starter
* PE expansion plug 0 3RA62 reversing starter

6/120 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Overview (continued)
$ Infeed ) PE infeeds
The 3-phase infeed is available with screw connection This module enables a PE cable to be connected.
(25/35 mm2 up to 63 A or 50/70 mm2 up to 100 A) and spring-
load connection (25/35 mm2 up to 63 A). The PE infeed can be ordered with screw connection and
spring-loaded connection (35 mm2) and can be fitted on the
The infeed with spring-loaded terminal can be fitted on the left right or left to the expansion block.
as well on as the right to an expansion module.
* PE expansion plug
The infeed with screw terminal is supplied only with a 3-socket
expansion module and permanently fitted on the left side. The PE expansion plug is inserted from below and enables two
PE bars to be connected.
The infeeds with screw connection enable connection of the
main conductors (L1, L2, L3) either from above or from below. + PE pick-off
The infeed with screw connection is supplied complete with The PE pick-off is available with screw connection and spring-
1 end cover, the infeed with spring-load connection complete loaded connection (6/10 mm2). It is snapped into the infeed
with 2 end covers. system from below.

% Three-socket expansion module , Connecting plates

The expansion module with 3 sockets for compact feeders is Two connecting plates are used to hold together
available with screw connection and with spring-loaded connec- 2 expansion modules.
tion. - End covers
Expansion modules enable the infeed system to be expanded On the last expansion module of a row, the socket provided for
and can be fitted to each other in any number. the expansion plug can be covered by inserting the end cover.
Two expansion modules are held together with the help of 2 con-
necting plates and 1 expansion plug. These assembly parts are . 45 mm adapters for SIRIUS motor starter protectors
included in the scope of supply of the respective expansion SIRIUS motor starter protectors size S0 with screw connection
module. can be fitted to the adapter, enabling them to be plugged into
the infeed system.
6
When the infeed system for 3RA6 is used, the compact feeders
(plug-in modules) are easily mounted and removed even when Terminal blocks
live.
Using the terminal block the 3 phases can be fed out of the
Optional possibilities: system; this means that single-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase
• PE connection on motor outgoing side components can also be integrated in the system.
• Outfeed for external auxiliary devices
• Connection to 3RV19 infeed system After the end cover is pulled out, the terminal block can be
• Integration of SIRIUS motor starter protectors size S00 and S0 plugged onto an expansion module.
(using 3RA68 90-0BA adapter)
Expansion plug for SIRIUS 3RV19 infeed systems
& Two-socket expansion modules
After the end cover is pulled out, the expansion plug for the
If only 2 instead of 3 additional sockets are required, then the SIRIUS 3RV19 infeed system can be plugged onto an expansion
2-socket expansion module is the right choice. It has the same module. It connects the infeed system for 3RA6 with the
functionality as the 3-socket expansion module. SIRIUS 3RV19 infeed system.
( Expansion plug
Two expansion modules can be connected together using the
expansion plug. Flexible expansion of the infeed system is thus
possible.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/121

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Overview (continued)
Maximum rated operational current Proposal for upstream short-circuit protection devices
The following maximum rated operational currents apply for the The following short-circuit data apply for the components of the
components of the infeed system for 3RA6: infeed system for 3RA6:

Component Maximum rated operational Conduc- Inscriptions Proposal for

current tor upstream short-circuit
cross- protection device
A section
Infeed with screw connection 100 mm²
50/70 mm²
Short-circuit protection for
Infeed with screw connection 63 infeed block (25 mm² / 35 mm²)
25/35 mm² with screw connection
Infeed with spring-load connection 63 2.5 ... 35 Id, max = 19 kA, I²t = 440 kA²s 3RV10 41-4JA10
25/35 mm²
Short-circuit protection for
Expansion plug 63 infeed block (50 mm² / 70 mm²)
with screw connection
In a row of several expansion modules, the maximum rated
operational current from the 2nd expansion module to the end 2.5 ... 70 Id,max = approx. 22 kA 3RV10 41-4MA10
of the row is 63 A. Short-circuit protection for infeed block
with spring-loaded connection
4 Id, max = 9.5 kA, I²t = 85 kA²s 3RV10 21-4DA10
6 Id, max = 12.5 kA, I²t = 140 kA²s 3RV10 31-4EA10
10 Id, max = 15 kA, I²t = 180 kA²s 3RV10 31-4HA10
16 / 25 Id, max = 19 kA, I²t = 440 kA²s 3RV10 41-4JA10
Short-circuit protection for terminal block
1.5 Id, max = 7.5 kA 5SY...
6 2.5 Id, max = 9.5 kA 1)

4 Id, max = 9.5 kA

6 Id, max = 12.5 kA
1)
To prevent the possibility of short-circuits, the cables on the terminal block
must be installed so that they are short-circuit resistant according to
EN 60439-1 Section 7.5.5.1.2.

6/122 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Selection and ordering data

Type Order No.
3-phase infeeds and expansion modules
Infeed with screw connection 25/35 mm2 on left with permanently fitted 3RA68 12-8AB
3-socket expansion module with screw connection on outgoing side
and integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or
1 direct-on-line starter and 1 reversing starter

3RA68 12-8AB
Infeed with screw connection 25/35 mm2 on left with permanently fitted 3RA68 12-8AC
3-socket expansion module with spring-loaded terminals on outgoing side
and integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or
1 direct-on-line starter and 1 reversing starter

3RA68 12-8AC
Infeed with screw connection 50/70 mm2 on left with permanently fitted 3RA68 13-8AB
3-socket expansion module with screw connection on outgoing side
and integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or
1 direct-on-line starter and 1 reversing starter suitable
for UL duty according to UL 508 Type E
6

3RA68 13-8AB
Infeed with screw connection 50/70 mm2 on left with permanently fitted 3RA68 13-8AC
3-socket expansion module with spring-loaded terminals on outgoing side
and integrated PE bar
Expansion module with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or
1 direct-on-line starter and 1 reversing starter suitable
for UL duty according to UL 508 Type E

3RA68 13-8AC
Infeed with spring-load connection 25/35 mm2 on left or on right up to 63 A 3RA68 30-5AC

3RA68 30-5AC

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/123

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Expansion modules
2-socket expansion modules with screw connection 3RA68 22-0AB
and integrated PE bar
with 2 sockets for 2 direct-on-line starters or 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates are included in the scope of supply.

3RA68 22-0AB
3-socket expansion modules with screw connection 3RA68 23-0AB
and integrated PE bar
with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line starter
and 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates are included in the scope of supply.

3RA68 23-0AB
2-socket expansion modules with spring-loaded connection 3RA68 22-0AC
and integrated PE bar
with 2 sockets for 2 direct-on-line starters or 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates are included in the scope of supply.

3RA68 22-0AC
3-socket expansion modules with spring-loaded connection 3RA68 23-0AC
and integrated PE bar
with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line starter
and 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting plates are included in the scope of supply.

3RA68 23-0AC

6/124 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
Accessories for infeed systems for 3RA6
PE infeed 25/35 mm2 with screw connection 3RA68 60-6AB

3RA68 60-6AB
PE infeed 25/35 mm2 with spring-loaded connection 3RA68 60-5AC

3RA68 60-5AC
PE pick-off 6/10 mm2 with screw connection 3RA68 70-4AB

6
3RA68 70-4AB
PE pick-off 6/10 mm2 with spring-loaded connection 3RA68 70-3AC

3RA68 70-3AC
PE expansion plug 3RA68 90-0EA

3RA68 90-0EA
Expansion plug between 2 expansion modules 3RA68 90-1AB
Is included in the scope of supply of the expansion modules.

3RA68 90-1AB
Expansion plug for SIRIUS 3RV19 infeed system 3RA68 90-1AA
connects infeed system for 3RA6 to 3RV19 infeed system

3RA68 90-1AA

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/125

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the control cabinet
3RA6 compact feeders
Infeed system for 3RA6

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Type Order No.
45 mm adapters for SIRIUS motor starter protectors 3RA68 90-0BA
size S0 with screw connection

3RA68 90-0BA
Terminal blocks 3RV19 17-5D
With spring-type connection for integration of single-phase,
2-phase and 3-phase external components

3RV19 17-5D

Version Size Order No.

Tools for spring-loaded terminals
Screwdrivers
3.5 mm x 0.5 mm, Length approx. 175 mm; 8WA2 803

6 suitable for a max. conductor cross-section

of 2.5 mm2
green

8WA2 803

6/126 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the field, high degree of protection
AS-Interface compact starters, 400 V AC

■ Overview
EDS/ERS compact starters (solid-state)
The solid-state compact starters EDS (direct-on-line starter) and
ERS (reversing starter) consist of a solid-state overload relay
and a solid-state motor starter protector unit.
The advantages of these solid-state compact starters are the
broad limits within which the overload protection can be ad-
justed (the performance range up to 2.2 kW at 400/500 V AC is
covered with just 2 variants), the fact that the motor starter pro-
tector units are non-wearing, current measurement (used for
monitoring the energy connector), emergency operation in the
event of an overload as well as remote resetting via the AS-
Interface after overload tripping.
The ERS compact starter is designed for direct start in reversing
duty. The solid-state overload protection and the shutdown re-
sponse in the event of overload can be adjusted directly at the
device.
Version with brake contact
The AS-Interface compact starter is a load feeder with degree of All compact starters are available optionally with a separately
protection IP65, which is fully prewired inside, for switching and activated brake contact for electrically operated motor brakes.
protecting any AC loads up to 5.5 kW at 400/500 V AC (electro- For externally fed motor brakes, 24 V DC is supplied jointly with
mechanical compact starter) or up to 2.2 kW (solid-state com- the load voltage through the power connector on -X1. It is looped
pact starter) – mostly standard induction motors in direct start through via -X3 for supplying the next compact starter on -X1.
and reversing duty. It consists either of an electromechanical The 24 V DC supply for the brakes is only linked in those devices
controlgear combination or a solid-state overload protection and equipped with a brake contact. At the project configuration
motor starter protector unit. The overload or short-circuit protec- stage, it is important to ensure that these starters are located
tion is located below a sealable, transparent cover and is there- alongside each other.
fore available for diagnostics. Two LEDs are provided to the left
of the cover for diagnostics purposes for the AS-Interface and
All compact starters with a brake contact for 500 V DC can be
equipped with an 400 V AC brake contact. 6
the auxiliary power.
Hand-held device
It is not possible for live parts to be touched even when the cover
is open. The contacts are activated through the integrated out- The hand-held device enables the compact starter to be oper-
puts. The status of the device is scanned through the inputs, ated locally and autonomously, providing that the auxiliary volt-
e.g. feedback from the auxiliary contacts of the motor starter age supply is connected. Thus, assuming that the automation
protector and contactor(s). A further input is used to detect the level is functioning correctly, local switching operations can be
operating mode of the optional hand-held device. The three carried out in addition to normal manual operations in the event
power connectors are used to feed and loop through to the load of a programmable controller / bus system failure (emergency
supply voltage (power bus) and to connect to the load itself. mode) or during test runs before commissioning, e.g. for testing
Prefabricated power supply cables can be used to connect the direction of rotation of the motor. The hand-held device can
compact starters which are directly adjacent to each other. be connected to the compact starter by means of a connecting
Prefabricated power supply lines can be used to connect cable through a socket underneath the transparent cover.
compact starters which are directly adjacent to each other.
The maximum number of starters that can be supplied with one Spare inputs
power supply cable is limited by the maximum permissible The compact starters are also equipped with two spare inputs.
summation current (up to max. 4 mm2 corresponds to ~ 35 A).
The M12 socket is a "Y" connector. The signal inputs are applied
DS/RS compact starters (electromechanical) to PIN 2 and 4. In this manner, it is possible, for example, to con-
The electromechanical compact starters consist of a conven- nect an optical proximity switch that supplies a signal and the
tional controlgear combination with a SIRIUS motor starter pro- "contamination" alarm.
tector for protection against short-circuits and overloading and A "T" adapter can be used to split the signal inputs onto two
SIRIUS contactor(s) for normal switching. The advantages of the M12 sockets. Compact starters modified in this way offer addi-
electromechanical starters are the reliable electrical isolation tional advantages. At no extra cost, it is possible to save AS-i ad-
during disconnection and tripping, the integrated fuseless pro- dresses, reduce the space requirement and to build up logical
tection against short-circuits and the favorable price. What is groupings.
more, direct currents can also be switched with the electrome-
chanical starters.
Configuring note:
In the case of temperature-critical applications, we recommend
operation in the lower setting range of the motor starter protector.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/127

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the field, high degree of protection
AS-Interface compact starters, 400 V AC

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
EDS compact starters 3RK1 322-7 7S12-0AA 7
solid-state direct-on-line starter
with two spare digital inputs
ERS compact starters 3RK1 322-7 7S12-1AA 7
solid-state reversing starter
with two spare digital inputs
Order No. supplement for

3RK1 322 Induction motor 4-pole at 400 V AC Setting range of the electronic trip unit
Standard output P
N S A 0 _ 0 0 0 9 8

kW A
0.18 ... 0.8 0.6 ... 2.18 0A
0.75 ... 2.2 2.0 ... 5.95 0B
DS compact starters 3RK1 322-7 7S02-0AA 7
electromechanical direct-on-line starter, with two spare digital inputs
RS compact starters 3RK1 322-7 7S02-1AA 7
electromechanical reversing starter, with two spare digital inputs
Order No. supplement for
Induction motor 4-pole at 400 V AC Setting range of the electronic trip unit
Standard output P

3RK1 322 kW A
<0.06 0.14 ... 0.20 0B
0.06 0.18 ... 0.25 0C

6
0.09 0.22 ... 0.32 0D
0.10 0.28 ... 0.40 0E
0.12 0.35 ... 0.50 0F
0.18 0.45 ... 0.63 0G
0.21 0.55 ... 0.80 0H
0.25 0.70 ... 1.0 0J
0.37 0.9 ... 1.25 0K
0.55 1.1 ... 1.6 1A
0.75 1.4 ... 2.0 1B
0.90 1.8 ... 2.5 1C
1.1 2.2 ... 3.2 1D
1.5 2.8 ... 4.0 1E
1.9 3.5 ... 5.0 1F
2.2 4.5 ... 6.3 1G
3.0 5.5 ... 8.0 1H
4.0 7.0 ... 10 1J
5.5 9.0 ... 12 1K
Additional price
Standard version 0
Version with brake contact for 24 V DC/3 A externally-fed brakes 1
Version with brake contact for 400 V AC/0.5 A infeed for brake rectifier 3
Version with brake contact for DC-side switching of the brakes with 500 V DC/0.2 A 4
Accessories for 24 V DC, M12 plugs
M12 coupler plugs 3RX8 000-0CD55
for connecting actuators or sensors
5-pole
M12 angular coupler plugs 3RX8 000-0CE55
6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0 for connecting actuators or sensors
5-pole
M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
for connecting two sensors with a single cable
5-pole
M12 sealing caps 3RX9 802-0AA00
for closing unused input or output sockets

6/128 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the field, high degree of protection
AS-Interface compact starters, 400 V AC

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
Accessories for AS-Interface compact starters (Han Q 8/0)
Connector sets for energy supply, 9-pole
comprising
1 connector enclosure with Pg16 gland
Female insert, 9-pole
6 female contacts
• Suitable for cable 4 × 2.5 mm2, 6 × 2.5 mm2 3RK1 902-0CA00
3RK1 902-0CA00
• Suitable for cable 4 × 4 mm2/6 × 4 mm2 3RK1 902-0CB00
Connector sets for power loop-through connection, 9-pole
comprising
1 connector enclosure with Pg16 gland
1 pin insert, 9-pole
6 male contacts
• Suitable for cable 4 × 2.5 mm2/6 × 2.5 mm2 3RK1 902-0CC00
3RK1 902-0CC00 • Suitable for cable 4 × 4 mm2/6 × 4 mm2 3RK1 902-0CD00
Connector sets for motor connections, 1.5 mm2, 9-pole 3RK1 902-0CE00
comprising
1 connector enclosure with Pg16 gland
1 pin insert, 9-pole
8 male contacts 1.5 mm2
3RK1 902-0AH00
Sealing caps
for 9-pole power socket (-X3)
• One set contains one unit 3RK1 902-0CK00
• One set contains ten units 3RK1 902-0CJ00
Power supply cables
9-pole
• 6 × 4 mm2, 0.12 m long 3RK1 902-0CH00
6
• 4 × 4 mm2, 0.12 m long 3RK1 902-0CG00
Motor connection cables, 4 x 1.5 mm2
with power connector, 9-pole
• Length: 3 m 3RK1 902-0CM00
• Length: 5 m 3RK1 902-0CP00
• Length: 10 m 3RK1 902-0CQ00
Motor connection cables, 6 x 1.5 mm2
with power connector, 9-pole
• Length: 3 m 3RK1 902-0CN00
• Length: 5 m 3RK1 902-0CR00
• Length: 10 m 3RK1 902-0CS00
Crimping tools
• For male and female contacts 3RK1 902-0AH00
1.5 ... 2.5 mm2
• For male and female contacts 3RK1 902-0CT00
1.5 ... 4 mm2
Dismantling tools 3RK1 902-0AJ00
for disassembling male and female contacts in 9-pole inserts
Miscellaneous accessories
Manuals for AS-Interface compact starters
German, English 3RK1 702-2GB10-2AA0
Mounting plates for compact starters 3RK1 902-0AP00
for accommodating the shaped cable for AS-Interface line and auxiliary supply
Sealing sets for mounting plates 3RK1 902-0AR00
for sealing the enclosure at the end of a
spur line
Hand-held devices for start-up 3RK1 902-0AM00
3RK1 902-0AP00 with 0.5 m connecting cable and plug

3RK1 902-0AM00

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/129

 AS-Interface Slaves
Motor starters for operation in the field, high degree of protection
3RK1 3 ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters

■ Overview
The starters can be installed close to the motor or mounted on
the motor.
The following are available
• Single devices for geographically distributed motors and
• Isolated solutions (ET 200X) for operating mechanisms
installed close together.
The functionality in the ECOFAST system ranges from direct-
on-line starters, to reversing starters and soft starters through to
frequency converters.
Brake contacts are available as an option for the starters. Two
or four integrated digital inputs enable sensors to be scanned
locally.
All starters are equipped throughout with standardized inter-
faces for data and energy according to the ECOFAST specifica-
tion:
• HanBrid for PROFIBUS DP and insulation piercing method for
AS-Interface
• Han Q4/2 for the power supply
Distributed motor starters are used for switching and protecting • Han 10 E for motor connection
loads locally. Variants with graded functional scope and with
different installation possibilities ensure that both the functional The starters can be connected using T pieces for data and T
requirements of the process and the constructional boundary terminal connectors for power to prevent interruption.
conditions of the machine or installation are taken into account. The 3RK1 922-3BA00 hand-held device is also available
Distributed motor starters are available for PROFIBUS DP and for local operation (see Catalog LV 1).
AS-Interface.
Detailed technical specifications of the ECOFAST motor starters
and soft starters can be found in the manual "ECOFAST Motor

6
Starters".
Technical specifications can be found in LV 1 T.

■ Selection and ordering data

Fieldbus interface Switching function Motor protection Setting range/ Brake output Order No.
performance range
PROFIBUS DP mechanical Thermistor 0.3 ... 9 A/4 kW1) No 3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA3
Thermal 0.3 ... 3 A/1.1 kW No 3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA0
motor model
400 V AC 3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA3
2.4 ... 9 A/4 kW No 3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA3
Electronic, soft Full motor protection 0.3 ... 3 A/1.1 kW No 3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA3
2.4 ... 12 A/5.5 kW No 3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA3
Electronic, soft, Full motor protection 0.6 ... 4 A/1.5 kW 400 V AC 3RK1 303-6ES84-3AA3
multi-speed, R2SS
AS-Interface mechanical Thermistor 0.3 ... 9 A/4 kW1) No 3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA3
Thermal 0.3 ... 3 A/1.1 kW No 3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA0
motor model
400 V AC 3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA3
2.4 ... 9 A/4 kW No 3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA3
Electronic, soft Full motor protection 0.3 ... 3 A/1.1 kW No 3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA3
2.4 ... 12 A/5.5 kW No 3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA0
400 V AC 3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA3
Electronic, soft, Full motor protection 0.6 ... 4 A/1.5 kW 400 V AC 3RK1 323-6ES84-3AA3
multi-speed, R2SS
1)
The range from 0.3 ... 9 A is fixed and cannot be set or modified manually.

6/130 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
Motor starters, 24 V DC

■ Overview
Quick-stop function
All AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters feature a quick-stop
function which can be switched on and off as required using a
switch integrated into the module. The quick-stop function al-
lows a connected motor to be disconnected immediately using
an applied sensor signal (High). The switch for the quick-stop
function is located alongside the input sockets and is protected
by an M12 sealing cap.
Brake
The double direct-on-line starter and the single reversing starter
versions feature an integrated permanently set brake function,
i. e. as soon as the output signal is set to "0", the motor is braked.
Start-up using integrated buttons
Buttons integrated into the module (below the output sockets)
can be used to set the motor used. The buttons are protected by
an M12 sealing cap.
Connection of a drive roller with integrated DC motor to an Note:
AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starter Concerning double and reversing starters: If an input with the
quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the corresponding
With the K60 AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters for the low-end output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 –> output 1) is switched off within
performance range up to 70 W, it is now possible to connect the device (the motor is braked). The manual key function
24 V DC motors and the associated sensors directly on-the-spot (Key 1/2) for local operation is only permitted to be used during
to the AS-Interface quickly and easily. "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC.
Three different versions are available: Note:
• Single direct-on-line starters (without brake and reversible Concerning single direct-on-line starters: If an input with the
quick-stop function)
• Double direct-on-line starters (with brake and reversible
quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the corresponding
output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 –> output 1) is switched off within 6
quick-stop function) the device (the motor runs down without being braked). The
manual key function (Key 1) for local operation is only permitted
• Reversing starters (with brake and reversible quick-stop to be used and defined during "CPU Stop" in the higher-level
function) PLC.
DC motors are connected to the module using M12 plug-in
connections. The sensors and the module electronics can be
supplied from the yellow AS-Interface cable. An auxiliary voltage
(24 V DC) is only required for supplying the outputs, which can
be provided via the black AS-Interface cable.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/131

 AS-Interface Slaves
IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
Motor starters, 24 V DC

■ Overview
Applications

S in g le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith o u t b r a k e D o u b le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith b r a k e S in g le r e v e r s in g s ta r te r w ith b r a k e

( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n ) ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n ) ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n )

1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r 1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r 1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r

s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l
S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 2
o ff o ff o ff
4 2 o n Q u ic k - s t o p f o r 4 2 o n Q u ic k - s to p f o r 4 2 o n
In p u t 1 S e n s o r 3 In p u t 1 S e n s o r 3 Q u ic k - s to p fo r S e n s o r 3
o u tp u t o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff In p u t 1
4 o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
o n /o ff S e n s o r 4 4 o ff 4 o ff
In p u t 2 In p u t 2 o n Q u ic k - s t o p f o r S e n s o r 4 In p u t 2 o n S e n s o r 4
Q u ic k - s to p fo r
2 2 o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff 2 o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
B ra k e S h o r t - c ir c u it b r a k e
O u tp u t ( w ith c o a s tin g ) P lu g b r a k e
O u tp u t 1 O u tp u t 2 O u tp u t M o to r
M o to r M o to r 2 C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n
B u tto n 1 C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e
B u tto n B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 (m a n u a l B u tto n 2 r o ta t io n
(m a n u a l (m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a t io n fo r (m a n u a l o p e r a t io n
M o to r 1 fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )
o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a tio n ) c lo c k w is e
A d d re s s A d d re s s r o ta tio n ) A d d re s s

2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o 2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o 2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o

s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r s ig n a l
P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l
S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1 S e n s o r s ig n a l S e n s o r 1
P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l P o llu tio n s ig n a l
o ff o ff o ff
4 2 o n 4 2 o n 4 2 o n
In p u t 1 Q u ic k - s t o p f o r Q u ic k - s to p f o r S e n s o r 2 In p u t 1 Q u ic k - s to p fo r S e n s o r 2
S e n s o r 2 In p u t 1
o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
4 o u tp u t 4 o ff 4 o ff
In p u t 2 o n /o ff o n In p u t 2 o n
In p u t 2 Q u ic k - s t o p f o r Q u ic k - s to p fo r
2 2 2
P lu g b r a k e o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff
B ra k e
O u tp u t P lu g b r a k e
( w ith c o a s tin g ) O u tp u t 1 O u tp u t 2 O u tp u t M o to r

6
M o to r M o to r 2 C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n
B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e
B u tto n
(m a n u a l
B u tto n 1 B u tto n 2 (m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a t io n r o ta t io n
(m a n u a l ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n ) M o to r 1 o p e r a t io n fo r fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )
o p e r a tio n ) o p e r a tio n ) c lo c k w is e
A d d re s s A d d re s s A d d re s s
r o ta tio n ) N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 4 8 a

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
Single direct-on-line starters1) 3RK1 400-1NQ01-0AA4
4 inputs
1 output
Quick-stop function
Double direct-on-line starters1) 3RK1 400-1MQ01-0AA4
4 inputs
2 outputs
Quick-stop function
Single reversing starters1) 3RK1 400-1MQ03-0AA4
4 inputs
1 output
Quick-stop function
3RK1 400-1MQ01-0AA4
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
suitable for all K60 compact modules
• Wall mounting 3RK1 901-0CA00
• Standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-0CB01

3RK1 901-0CA00
AS-Interface sealing caps M12 3RK1 901-1KA00
for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00
AS-Interface sealing caps M12, 3RK1 901-1KA01
tamper-proof
for free M12 sockets
3RK1 901-1KA01
Sealing sets 3RK1 902-0AR00
• For K60 mounting plate and standard distributor
• Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
3RK1 902-0AR00 • Set contains one straight and one shaped seal
1)
Modules supplied without mounting plate.

6/132 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
AS-Interface load feeder module

■ Overview
As the outputs already have overvoltage protection integrated,
no additional measures for the contactors are required.
The outputs are supplied with separate auxiliary voltage –
a selectively configured EMERGENCY STOP concept is thus
easy to implement. The inputs are supplied from the AS-Inter-
face data line. Inputs and outputs have to be wired using inte-
grated, spring-loaded terminals, each connected to a common
potential.

The AS-Interface load feeder module adds an input/output

module to the conventional busbar and standard mounting rail
adapters. With this module the control circuit of a load feeder is
available completely factory-wired. The series has been opti-
mized for operation in conjunction with the SIRIUS load feeders
size S00 and S0. Connection to the higher-level automation
system is made through the AS-Interface interface of the load
feeder module. A non-shielded litz wire can be used as data line
and for the auxiliary current supply. Connection to the AS-Inter-
face load feeder module is made using two connectors with the
insulation displacement connection. 6
Four different AS-Interface load feeder modules are available:
Differences exist in the number of inputs and outputs and in the
type of outputs. The units with solid-stated outputs are designed
for 24 V DC, those with relay outputs are suitable for voltages of
max. 230 AC. Direct-on-line and reversing starters as well as
double direct-on-line starters and starter combinations can thus
be wired for pole reversal. The inputs can be used to separately
scan the feedbacks from motor starter protectors and contac-
tors. The outputs can be used for direct control of the contactor
coils.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/133

 AS-Interface Slaves
IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
AS-Interface load feeder module

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface load feeder module
For standard rail mounting, for contactors size S00 and S0,
for mounting onto 40 mm or 60 mm busbar systems and SIRIUS standard mounting rail
adapters the matching support is required (see Accessories)
The AS-Interface connectors for the data and auxiliary supply cable (yellow and black)
must be ordered separately (see Accessories)
Type Supply in V
• 2 inputs / 1 output DC 241) 3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1
• 4 inputs / 2 outputs 3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1
3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1
3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1 • 2 inputs / 1 relay output AC 120/2302) 3RK1 402-3KG02-0AA1
• 3 inputs / 2 relay outputs 3RK1 402-3LG02-0AA1
Accessories3)
Manuals for AS-Interface
load feeder modules
• German, English 3RK1 701-2GB00-0AA0
• Italian, French 3RK1 701-2HB00-0AA0
Supports for AS-Interface
load feeder module
• With PE and N conductor connection,
for mounting on busbar adapter with
40 mm center-to-center clearance,
3RK1 901-0EA00 power connector set is required
- 45 mm width 3RK1 901-3AA00
- 54 mm width 3RK1 901-3BA00

6 Holder with mounted

3RK1 901-3.A00 power con-
nector coupling
• With PE and N conductor connection,
for mounting on busbar adapter with
60 mm center-to-center clearance.
3RK1 901-0EA00 power connector set is required
- 45 mm width 3RK1 901-3CA00
- 54 mm width 3RK1 901-3DA00
• Without PE/ground and N conductor connection,
for mounting on busbar adapter with
40 mm or 60 mm center-to-center clearance
- 45 mm width 3RK1 901-3EA00
- 54 mm width 3RK1 901-3FA00
• For mounting onto 3RA19 22-1A SIRIUS
standard mounting rail adapter
- 45 mm width 3RK1 901-3GA00
Power connector sets
5-pole, 2.5 mm2 3RK1 901-0EA00
(1 set includes 1 plug and 1 coupling)
3RK1 901-0EA00
AS-Interface connectors for data and auxiliary supply cables
With insulation displacement terminals for
2 x (0.5 to 0.75 mm2) standard litz wire
3RK1 901-0NA00 • Yellow 3RK1 901-0NA00
3RK1 901-0PA00
• Black 3RK1 901-0PA00
1)
Without connectors for data and auxiliary power (yellow and black).
2)
With one connector each for data and auxiliary power (yellow and red).
3)
For busbar accessories, see Catalog LV 1, "SIVACON Power Distribution
Boards, Busway and Cubicle Systems".

6/134 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders
SIRIUS soft starters

■ Overview
The solid-state SIRIUS soft starters are suitable for controlled
soft starting and ramp-down of three-phase asynchronous mo-
tors. The reduction of the starting torque not only protects the
motor but also increases the availability of the systems.
Motor feeders capable of communicating with these soft starters
can be designed with just a few manual steps and accessory
parts.
The advantages of a soft starter are:
• Reduction of the mechanical load in the entire operating
mechanism
• Reduced load on the power supply network

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
SIRIUS soft starters
device rated operational voltage Ue at 400 V
(ambient temperature 40 °C)
Rated power of the motors
• 3 kW 3RW3 014-1CB 7 4
• 4 kW
Rated control supply voltage
3RW3 016-1CB 7 4
6
SIRIUS soft starters • UC = 24 V 0
with AS-Interface 1
load feeder module 1) • UC = 110 to 230 V
AS-Interface load feeder module
• 2 inputs / 1 output / 24 V DC 3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1
• 2 inputs / 1 relay output / 120/230 V AC 3RK1 402-3KG02-0AA1
1) Just support, connection plug and power connector set are required to mount
the AS-Interface load feeder module onto the standard mounting rail adapter.

Detailed information on solid-state soft starters can be found in

the Catalog LV 10, Section: Switchgear:
Semiconductor controlgear, soft starters, control equipment
More information can be found in the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/135

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface Enclosure – General Data

■ Overview
Installation of AS-Interface slaves
The following
slave types are available for connecting the command positions:
7 Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs
7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs
7 F slave with 2 safe inputs for EMERGENCY STOP

The following table shows the maximum number of equippable

slaves:
Enclosures for Number of slaves Number of slaves
for enclosures without for enclosures with
EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP
1 command Not available 1x F slave
position
2 command 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O Not available
positions
3 command 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
positions + 1 x F slave
Distributed command devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly
4 command 2 x slave 4I/4O or 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures. positions 4I/3O1) + 1 × F slave1)
Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures
with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing enclo- 6 command 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
sures. positions + 1 x F slave
1) For metal enclosures with 4 command positions, only 1 x slave 4E/4A
or 4E/3A is possible.

Connection
6 One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to
contact blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element.
The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable
glands and are used for connection of the AS-Interface or for
bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the enclosure.
For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice of the
following options:
7 Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable. The cable is con-
tacted by the insulation piercing method and routed past
the enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic enclo-
sure).
7 Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round
cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for
metal enclosure).
7 Connection using M12 plug.

If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclo-

sure are used for connecting the command devices, free inputs
and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an
M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure.
To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the slave must
NSD0_01414

be assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT– connection

must be assigned.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is
not required.
For dimensional drawings, see Technical Information LV 1 T,
Chapter 9.

6/136 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings

■ Overview
Enclosures with standard fittings are available with: EMERGENCY STOP enclosures are fitted with two NC contact
7 1 to 3 command positions blocks, which are wired to the safe slave. The contact blocks
and lampholders (with spring-loaded terminals) of the control
7 Operational voltage through AS-Interface (approx. 30 V), device, and the AS-Interface slaves, are mounted in the base of
7 Vertical mounting type the enclosure and are cable-connected.
7 Plastic enclosures are equipped with plastic actuators and in- The plastic versions of the enclosures have a connection for the
dicators, metal enclosures are equipped with metal actuators AS-Interface flat cable (the cable is routed past the enclosure on
and indicators. the outside); in the case of the metal versions the AS-Interface
The actuators/indicators are fixed with an enclosure nut. If re- cable is routed into the enclosure.
quired it can be disassembled with a 27 mm socket wrench or The metal versions of the EMERGENCY STOP enclosures can
with a 3SX17 07 ring nut wrench. also be supplied with an M12 plug in place of the gland.
The enclosures without EMERGENCY STOP each have one user
module with 4I/3O; the enclosures with EMERGENCY STOP
have a safe AS-Interface slave integrated in the enclosure.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface enclosures, plastic, with standard fittings
Equipment Number of
(A, B, C = identification letters command positions
of the command positions)
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-0AA08
yellow top part of enclosure
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-0AB08
yellow top part of enclosure, with protective collar
3SF5 811-0AA08
B = Pushbutton green, label "I" 2 3SF5 812-0DA00
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
B = Pushbutton white, label "I" 2 3SF5 812-0DB00
6
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription 3 3SF5 813-0DA00
B = Pushbutton green, label "I"
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, 3 3SF5 813-0DC00
3SF5 812-0DA00 B = Pushbutton white, label "I"
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
C = Pushbutton black, label "II" 3 3SF5 813-0DB00
B = Pushbutton black, label "I"
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
AS-Interface enclosures, metal, with standard fittings
Equipment Number of
(A, B, C = identification letters command positions
of the command positions)
With M12 connector socket
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-2AA10
3SF5 811-2AB08 yellow top part of enclosure
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-2AB10
yellow top part of enclosure, with protective collar
With cable gland
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-2AA08
yellow top part of enclosure
A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton, 1 3SF5 811-2AB08
yellow top part of enclosure, with protective collar
3SF5 812-2DA00 B = Pushbutton green, label "I" 2 3SF5 812-2DA00
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
B = Pushbutton white, label "I" 2 3SF5 812-2DB00
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription 3 3SF5 813-2DA00
B = Pushbutton green, label "I"
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, 3 3SF5 813-2DC00
B = Pushbutton white, label "I"
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
C = Pushbutton black, label "II" 3 3SF5 813-2DB00
3SF5 813-2DA00 B = Pushbutton black, label "I"
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/137

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
Components for AS-Interface enclosures

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

For self-equipping of the enclosures
Version Order No.
For plastic enclosures Number of
command positions
AS-Interface slaves
F slave, 2 safe inputs, 1 ... 6 3SF5 500-0BA
for plastic enclosure,
EMERGENCY STOP, without protective collar
F slave, 2 safe inputs, 1 3SF5 500-0DA
for plastic or metal enclosure,
3SF5 500-0BA EMERGENCY STOP, with protective collar
A/B slave, 4I/3O 2 ... 6 3SF5 500-0BB
for plastic enclosure
Slave, 4I/4O, 2 ... 6 3SF5 500-0BC
for plastic enclosure
Sets of links
For F slave 3SF5 900-0BA
3SF5 500-0BB For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O) 3SF5 900-0BB
Connection elements
For AS-Interface shaped cable, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CA
connection by insulation piercing method, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CB
for plastic enclosure,
3SF5 900-0CA For AS-Interface connection using M12 plug, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CC
for plastic enclosure 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CD
For bringing out unused inputs/outputs 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CE
6 through an M12 socket,
for plastic enclosure
4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CF

For AS-Interface shaped cable, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CG

3SF5 900-0CC cable is routed into the enclosure, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CH
for plastic or metal enclosure
For round cable, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CJ
cable is routed into the enclosure, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CK
for plastic or metal enclosure
3SF5 900-0CG
For metal enclosures Number of
command positions
AS-Interface slaves
F slave, 2 safe inputs, 1 ... 6 3SF5 500-0CA
for metal enclosure,
EMERGENCY STOP, without protective collar
F slave, 2 safe inputs, 1 3SF5 500-0DA
for plastic or metal enclosure,
EMERGENCY STOP, with protective collar
3SF5 500-0CB
A/B slave, 4I/3O 2 ... 6 3SF5 500-0CB
for metal enclosure
Slave, 4I/4O, 2 ... 6 3SF5 500-0CC
for metal enclosure
Sets of links
For F slave 3SF5 900-0BA
For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O) 3SF5 900-0BB
Connection elements
For AS-Interface connection using M12 plug, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-2CC
for metal enclosure 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-2CD
For bringing out unused inputs/outputs 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-2CE
3SF5 900-0CG through an M12 socket, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-2CF
for metal enclosure
For AS-Interface shaped cable, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CG
cable is routed into the enclosure, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CH
for plastic or metal enclosure
For round cable, 1 ... 3 3SF5 900-0CJ
cable is routed into the enclosure, 4 ... 6 3SF5 900-0CK
3SF5 900-0CJ for plastic or metal enclosure

Empty enclosures and elements for equipping can be found in Catalog LV 1, Chapter 9.

6/138 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
Customer-specific AS-Interface enclosures

■ Overview Connection
The customer-specific enclosure is delivered fully equipped and
wired. For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice
of the following options:
7 Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable.
The cable is contacted by the insulation piercing method and
routed past the enclosure on the outside (possible only with
plastic enclosure).
7 Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round
cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for
metal enclosure).
7 Connection using M12 plug.

If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclo-

sure are used for connecting the command devices, free inputs
and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an
M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure. The re-
quired pin assignment of the M12 socket must be entered in the
order documentation (see Options).
To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the slave must
be assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT– connection
The enclosures can be equipped with command devices as must be assigned.
required for customer-specific solutions to connect command
devices to the AS-Interface. Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is
Customer-specific enclosures are available with 2 to 6 command not required.
positions.
EMERGENCY STOP
One command position comprises:
On enclosures with EMERGENCY STOP, the EMERGENCY
7 1 actuator or indicator
STOP actuator can be wired conventionally or by way of a safe

6
7 Up to 3 contact blocks or up to 2 contact blocks AS-Interface slave.
+ 1 lampholder
With conventional wiring of the EMERGENCY STOP, up to three
7 1 inscription label switching contacts can be selected for the EMERGENCY STOP:
For plastic enclosures the command positions are equipped as if the EMERGENCY STOP is scanned via AS-Interface, two con-
standard with plastic actuators and indicators, for metal enclo- tacts are possible for the safety circuit.
sures they are equipped with metal actuators and indicators. With conventional wiring, the scanning of one EMERGENCY
For the equipping of the command positions, see Options. STOP contact block through AS-Interface is possible.
Installation of AS-Interface slaves
The following slave types are available for connecting the ■ Selection and ordering data
command positions: Selection and ordering of the customer-specific enclosures is
7 Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs carried out directly via the configurator for pushbutton units and
7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs
indicator lights. For further information, see "Options".
7 F slave with 2 safe inputs for EMERGENCY STOP
■ Options
The following table shows the maximum number of equippable
slaves: To order customized AS-Interface enclosures with the 3SB3 con-
trol devices, use the 3SB/3SF configurator to select the blocks
Enclosures for Number of slaves Number of slaves for equipping. An electronic order form will be generated for the
for enclosures without for enclosures with additional options. The configurator is available in the electronic
EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP
catalog CA 01 on CD-ROM or DVD or in the online catalog (Mall)
2 command 1 x slave 4I/4O Version not available on the Internet:
positions or 4I/3O
https://mall.automation.siemens.com
3 command 1 x slave 4I/4O 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
positions or 4I/3O + 1 x F slave Select the configurator for "3SB3, 3SF5 pushbutton units and
indicator lights" from the configurator list.
4 command 2 x slave 4I/4O 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O Start the configuration with the "Execute" list entry and choose
positions or 4I/3O1) + 1 × F slave1)
the "Customer-specific ASI enclosures".
6 command 2 x slave 4I/4O 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
positions or 4I/3O + 1 x F slave The list price of the complete enclosure is generated in the
configurator for the customized equipment.
1) For metal enclosures with 4 command positions,
only 1 x slave 4E/4A or 4E/3A is possible. Please send the resulting electronic order form along with your
order to our Competence Center at
sirius-attach.aud@siemens.com
If you are unable to access either catalog, please contact our
Technical Assistance.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/139

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface front panel module

■ Overview

AS-Interface cable

Terminal

NSD0_00053b
Front panel module

Command devices of the 3SB3 series mounted in the front The front panel module is mounted on the back of the front panel
panels can be connected to the AS-Interface bus system using on a group of four actuators and indicators arranged alongside
AS-Interface front panel modules. Plastic or metal pushbutton or on top of each other and secured with screws. The contact
units or indicator lights in round or square design can be used. blocks and lampholders are integrated in the module.
Mushroom pushbuttons and acoustic signaling devices cannot
be used. When mounting the control devices in the front panel module
make sure there is a grid of 30 mm × 45 mm.
The front panel module comprises:
Connection to the AS-Interface shaped cable is by means of a
7 Slave 4E/4A terminal positioned on the rear of the module using the insulation
6 7 4 3SB3 commanding and signaling devices
7 Accessories (lamps, name plates, mounting parts)
piercing method.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
The equipping elements are selected using the order documen- the integrated addressing socket.
tation (see Options).

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface front panel module
for 3SB3 control devices
4E/4A 3SF5 874-4AZ

6/140 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface front panel module

■ Options
To order the front panel module, please fill out the order form and in the form can be obtained from the list of options that are
include it with your order. This order form cannot be generated subject to a surcharge.
with the 3SB/3SF configurator. The electronic order form is avail-
able from our Technical Support: The price of the device is calculated from the basic price of the
module and the additional prices for the complements
Tel. (+49 (0) 911) 895-59 00 (see SIMATIC price list).
Enter the desired options in the order form, e. g. type of actua- The additional prices include all components which depend
tors and indicators, switching contacts, lampholders or acces- on the selected configuration options (actuators and indicators,
sories (labels and lamp type). The codes that are to be entered switching contacts, lampholders and accessories).

Order form
Front panel module to sirius-attach.aud@siemens.com
order documentation
Date Purchaser's order reference Supplier's order reference

1. Number of com- 2. Design of actuators

mand positions @ round, plastic
@ 4 command posi- @ square, plastic
tions
@ round, metal

3. Name plates
@ without
@ with name plate including glued in inscription label 12.5 mm × 27 mm
@ with name plate including glued in inscription label 27 mm × 27 mm
4. Equipment (top view of front side of switchboard)
6
Switchboard

Inscription of the name

plates

A B C D
Equipment (code)

Version of switching ele- left right left right left right left right
ments 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO
1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC
NSD0_00057d

5. Lamps for illuminated actuators and indicator lights

@ 24 V incandescent lamp (will be used unless otherwise specified)
@ 30 V incandescent lamp
@ Super-bright LED (color of LED according to color of actuator/indicator)

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/141

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface front panel module
Selection of equipping options according to order documentation
Version Code according to colors
Black Red Yellow Green Blue White Clear
Actuators and indicators
Pushbuttons with flat button DBK DRD DYE DGN DBU DWH DCL
Illuminated pushbuttons – DLRD DLYE DLGN DLBU DLWH DLCL
with flat button
Pushbuttons with raised button DHBK DHRD DHYE – DHBU – –
Illuminated pushbutton – DHLRD DHLYE DHLGN DHLBU – DHLCL
with raised button
Pushbutton with raised front ring DHFBK DHFRD DHFYE DHFGN DHFBU DHFWH –
Pushbutton with raised front ring, DFZBK DFZRD DFZYE DFZGN DFZBU DFZWH –
castellated1)
Pushbutton with flat button DSBK DSRD DSYE DSGN DSBU DSWH –
Illuminated pushbutton with flat button – DLSRD DLSYE DLSGN DLSBU DLSWH DLSCL
Indicator light, smooth lens – LRD LYE LGN LBU LWH LCL
Selector switches with 2 switch positions
Switching sequence O–I, latching
Non-illuminated K1 BK K1 RD – K1 GN – K1 WH –
Illuminated – BK1 RD BK1 YE BK1 GN BK1 BU – BK1 CL

Switching sequence O–I, momentary contact

Non-illuminated K2 BK K2 RD – K2 GN – K2 WH –
Illuminated – BK2 RD BK2 YE BK2 GN BK2 BU – BK2 CL

6
Selector switches with 3 switch positions
Switching sequence I–O–II, latching
Non-illuminated K4 BK K4 RD – K4 GN – K4 WH –
Illuminated – BK4 RD BK4 YE BK4 GN BK4 BU – BK4 CL

Switching sequence I–O–II, momentary contact

Non-illuminated K5 BK K5 RD – K5 GN – K5 WH –
Illuminated – BK5 RD BK5 YE BK5 GN BK5 BU – BK5 CL

Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the right, momentary contact to the left
Non-illuminated K6 BK K6 RD – K6 GN – K6 WH –

Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the left, momentary contact to the right
Non-illuminated K7 BK K7 RD – K7 GN – K7 WH –

1) Only for plastic version.

More information about these actuators and
indicator lights can be found in Catalog LV 1, Chapter 9.

6/142 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface front panel module
Selection of equipping options according to order documentation
Version Code
Key can be removed in any position
O I II O and I O and II I and II I, O and II
Key-operated switches with 2 switch positions
Switching sequence O–I, latching
RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB1A RSB1E – RSB1AE – – –
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES1A CES1E – CES1AE – – –
Lock No. LSG 1 CESL1A – – CESL1AE – – –
Type CES with key monitoring,
lock no. SSG 10 CES SU1A
Type BKS,
Lock No. S1 BKS1A BKS1E – BKS1AE – – –
Lock No. E1 (for VW) BKS A1A – – BKS A1AE – – –
Lock No. E2 (for VW) BKS E1A – – BKS E1AE – – –
Lock No. E7 (for VW) BKS C1A – – BKS C1AE – – –
Lock No. E9 (for VW) BKS B1A – – BKS B1AE – – –
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK1A OMR BK1E – OMR BK1AE – – –
Switching sequence O–I, momentary contact
RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB2A – – – – – –
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES2A – – – – – –
Lock No. LSG 1 CESL2A – – – – – –
BKS type,
Lock No. S1 BKS2A – – – – – – 6
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK2A – – – – – –
Key-operated switches with 3 switch positions
Switching sequence I–O–II, latching
RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB4A RSB4E RSB4D – – RSB4ED RSB4EAD
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES4A CES4E CES4D – – CES4ED CES4EAD
Type CES with key monitoring, CES SU4A
lock no. SSG 10
BKS type,
Lock No. S1 BKS4A BKS4E BKS4D – – BKS4ED BKS4EAD
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK4A – – – – OMR BK 4ED OMR BK 4EAD

Switching sequence I–O–II, momentary contact

RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB5A – – – – – –
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES5A – – – – – –
BKS type,
Lock No. S1 BKS5A – – – – – –
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK5A – – – – – –

More information about these actuators

can be found in Catalog LV 1, chapter 9.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/143

 AS-Interface Slaves
3SF5 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights
AS-Interface front panel module
Selection of equipping options according to order documentation
Version Code
Key can be removed in any position
O I II O and I O and II I and II I, O and II
Key-operated switches with 3 switch positions
Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the right, momentary contact to the left
RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB6A – RSB6D – RSB6AD – –
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES6A – CES6D – CES6AD – –
BKS type,
Lock No. S1 BKS6A – BKS6D – BKS6AD – –
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK6A – OMR BK 6D – OMR BK – –
6AD
Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the left, momentary contact to the right
RONIS type,
Lock No. SB30 RSB7A RSB7E – RSB7AE – – –
Type CES,
Lock No. SSG 10 CES7A CES7E – CES7AE – – –
BKS type,
Lock No. S1 BKS7A BKS7E – BKS7AE – – –
Type O.M.R.,
Black, Lock No. 73034 OMR BK7A OMR BK 7E – – – – –

More information about these actuators

can be found in Catalog LV 1, chapter 9.
6 ■ Dimensions
5 2

N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 3 6 a

1 2 0 4 5

6/144 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface Slaves

AS-Interface connections for LOGO!

■ Overview ■ Technical specifications

Every LOGO! can now be connected to the Supply voltage V DC 24
AS-Interface system Inputs/outputs 4/4
(virtual inputs / outputs)
Bus connection AS-Interface according
to specification
Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +55
Degree of protection IP20
Mounting Onto standard mounting rail
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 36 x 90 x 58
Indications of the LEDs
LEDs Status
• Green • OK
• Red • No data traffic
• Flashes red/yellow • Zero address

Using the AS-Interface connection for LOGO!, an intelligent

slave can be integrated in the AS-Interface system. With the
modular interface it becomes possible to integrate the different
basic units in the system according to their functionality.
Similarly, functionalities can be quickly and easily adapted to
new requirements by exchanging the basic unit.
The interface module provides four inputs and four outputs on
the system. These I/Os do not actually exist in hardware terms, 6
however, but are only virtually present through the interface on
the bus.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface connections for LOGO! 3RK1 400-0CE10-0AA2
• Four virtual inputs
• Four virtual outputs

3RK1 400-0CE10-0AA2

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/145

 AS-Interface Power supply units
Power Supply Units
AS-Interface power supplies, IP20

■ Overview ■ Benefits
• Compact dimensions save space in control cabinets or
in the field
• Higher output rating enables connection of even more
AS-Interface nodes
• Integrated ground-fault and overload detection ensure that
applications are more reliable and save the need for additional
components
• Diagnostics memory, remote indication and remote reset allow
fast detection of faults in the system, thus reducing downtimes
• Fast and stable installation of devices thanks to spring-type
connections
• Removable terminal blocks allow fast component replace-
ment, thus reducing downtimes
• The ultra-wide input range of the 8 A version permits single-
phase and 2-phase operation - so there is no need for connec-
tion of an N conductor
• UL/CSA approval means the power supplies can be used
worldwide
AS-Interface power supplies are an essential and functionally The 2.6 A version is approved according to NEC Class 2.
important part of an AS-Interface network. They supply the elec-
tronics of the network (AS-Interface modules and AS-Interface
masters) and the connected sensor technology. Furthermore,
■ Application
the integrated data decoupling of AS-Interface power supplies AS-Interface power supplies are always used in conjunction with
ensures the separation of data and energy, thus enabling AS- AS-Interface networks.
Interface to transmit data and power on a single cable.

■ Selection and ordering data

6 Version Order No.
AS-Interface power supply units, IP20
• Single output IP20
• With integrated ground-fault detection
• 2.6 A version NEC Class 2 Power Supply
Output current Input voltage
2.6 A Class 2 AC 120 / 230 V 3RX9 501-2BA00
(selectable)
3RX9 501–0BA00 3A AC 120 / 230 V 3RX9 501-0BA00
(selectable)
3A 24 V DC 3RX9 501-1BA00
5A AC 120 / 230 V 3RX9 502-0BA00
(selectable)
8A 120 / 230 ... 500 V AC 3RX9 503-0BA00
(selectable)

3RX9 502–0BA00

3RX9 503–0BA00

6/146 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
Transmission Media
AS-Interface shaped cables

■ Overview
To enable use in the most varied ambient conditions (e.g. in an
oily environment), the AS-Interface cable is available in different
materials (rubber, TPE, PUR).
For special applications it is also possible to use an unshielded
standard round cable H05VV-F 2x 1.5 mm² according to
AS-i Specification. With AS-Interface, data and power for the
sensors (e.g. BERO proximity switches) and actuators (e.g. indi-
cator lights) are transmitted over the yellow AS-Interface cable.
The black cable must be used for actuators with a 24 V DC
supply (e.g. solenoid valves) and a high power requirement.
Suitable for operation in tow chains
The use of the AS-Interface shaped cables with TPE and PUR
outer sheath was checked in a tow chain test with the following
conditions:
Chain length m 6
Travel m 10
Bending radius mm 75
The actuator-sensor interface – the networking system used for
the lowest field area – is characterized by very easy mounting Travel speed m/s 4
and installation. A new connection method was developed spe- Acceleration m/s2 4
cially for AS-Interface.
Number of cycles 10 million
The stations are connected using the AS-Interface cable. This Duration of test approx. 3 years
two-wire AS-Interface shaped cable has a trapezoidal shape, (11,000 cycles per day)
thus ruling out polarity reversal.
Connection is effected by the insulation piercing method. In After termination of the 10 million cycles only slight wear was
other words, male contacts pierce the shaped AS-Interface
cable and make reliable contact with the two wires. Cutting to
visible due to the lugs of the tow chain. The cores and core
insulation no damage could be detected. 6
length and stripping are superfluous. Consequently, AS-Inter-
Note:
face stations (e.g. I/O modules, intelligent devices) can be con-
nected in the shortest possible time and exchanging devices is When using a tow chain the cables must be installed free
quick. from tensile forces. On no account can the cables be cross-
connected, but must be routed flat through the tow chain.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface shaped cables
Material Color Quantity
Rubber Yellow (AS-Interface) 100-m roll 3RX9 010-0AA00
Yellow (AS-Interface) 1-km drum 3RX9 012-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 100-m roll 3RX9 020-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 1-km drum 3RX9 022-0AA00
TPE Yellow (AS-Interface) 100-m roll 3RX9 013-0AA00
Yellow (AS-Interface) 1-km drum 3RX9 014-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 100-m roll 3RX9 023-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 1-km drum 3RX9 024-0AA00
TPE special version1) Yellow (AS-Interface) 100-m roll 3RX9 017-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 100-m roll 3RX9 027-0AA00
PUR Yellow (AS-Interface) 100-m roll 3RX9 015-0AA00
Yellow (AS-Interface) 1-km drum 3RX9 016-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 100-m roll 3RX9 025-0AA00
Black (24 V DC) 1-km drum 3RX9 026-0AA00
1)
Special version according to UL Class 2

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/147

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Repeater/extender

■ Overview ■ Benefits

Repeaters
• Expansion of the range of applications and greater freedom in
plant design by extending the AS-Interface segment
• Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault
with separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage for
each end
Extenders
• Expansion of the range of applications and greater freedom in
plant design by extending the AS-Interface segment
• When the extender is used, the master can be located at a dis-
tance of up to 100 m and a power supply is not required at the
master end.

• Repeater for extending the AS-Interface cable by 100 m in

■ Application
each case The repeater is used in order to extend the AS-Interface seg-
• Extender for increasing the distance (max. 100 m) between ment by 100 m, whereby AS-Interface slaves and one AS-Inter-
the master and the AS-Interface segment face voltage supply are located on each side of the repeater.
• Up to two repeaters, or one extender and one repeater can be The extender is used to increase the distance between the
used in series master and the AS-Interface segment with the AS-Interface
slaves to a maximum of 100 m. On the side of the master there
• A parallel connection of several repeaters is possible (star are no AS-Interface slaves and no AS-Interface voltage supply.
configuration)

6 • Maximum extension of an AS-Interface network can thus be in-

creased to 500 m
• Simple assembly technology
• IP67 module housing

6/148 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Repeater/extender

■ Design ■ Ordering data Order No.

Repeater Repeater für AS-Interface 6GK1 210-0SA01
• Slaves can be used on both sides of the repeater for cable extension including
mounting plate
• AS-Interface power supply required on both sides
• Galvanic isolation of the two AS-Interface shaped cable lines Extender for AS-Interface 6GK1 210-1SA00

• Installed in K45 module case with mounting plate for remote mounting of the master
including coupling module FK-E
• Separate indication of the correct AS-Interface voltage for
each side
• No more than two repeaters can be used in series
(max. cable length 300 m)
• Parallel connection of several repeaters is possible
(point-to-point configuration)
• Combination of series and parallel switching is possible
(max. extent 500 m)

P P P

3RZHUVXSSO\

6 6 6 6 3RZHU
VXSSO\

0
5HSHDWHU 5HSHDWHU
3RZHU
VXSSO\ 6
*B,.B;;B

6
$6,QWHUIDFH
6 5HSHDWHU 3RZHUVXSSO\

Connection of repeaters

Extender
• Master can be positioned up to 100 m from actual AS-Inter-
face segment.
• Slaves can only be used on the opposite side to the master.
• An AS-Interface power supply is required only on the side
opposite to the master.
• No galvanic isolation of the two AS-Interface shaped cable
lines.
• Indication of the correct AS-Interface voltage.
• Installed in user module case with FK-E coupling module as
lower part.

P P P

1RVODYHV

3RZHUVXSSO\ 3RZHUVXSSO\

0
*B,.B;;B

([WHQGHU 5HSHDWHU

$6,QWHUIDFH
6 6 6

Extender connection

Note:
The extender can not be operated with the
DP/AS-Interface link 20E.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/149

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Extension plugs

■ Overview ■ Benefits
• Doubling of the cable length from 100 to 200 m per AS-
Interface segment
• More possibilities of use and greater freedom for plant
planning through doubling of the AS-Interface segment
• Notable reduction of network infrastructure costs for large
networks
• Enables in combination with repeaters a maximum range of up
to 600 m for AS-Interface networks (for details, see section
Configuration in the "Technical Information" LV1 T)
• Easy monitoring through integrated undervoltage detection

■ Design
To construct an AS-Interface segment with a cable length of
more than 100 m and up to a maximum of 200 m, the extension
plug / extension plug plus is installed at that point of the network
which is furthest from the AS-Interface power supply unit. This
point does not have to be localized exactly; it suffices to connect
the extension plug / extension plug plus in its vicinity (approx.
With the extension plug / extension plug plus it is possible to ±10 m).
double the cable length possible in an AS-Interface segment
from 100 to 200 m. As with all AS-Interface networks, any network structure (line,
tree, star) is possible when using the extension plug / extension
The extension plug / extension plug plus is a passive component plug plus. Only one extension plug / extension plug plus is
which is connected to that point of the AS-Interface network that required per 200-m segment even with a tree or star structure.
is furthest away from the power supply. It has an M12 plug for As a passive network component the extension plug does not
quick connection to the AS-Interface M12 feeder with degree of need an AS-Interface address. The extension plug plus has an
protection IP67. integral AS-Interface A/B slave for the diagnostic signal and thus
requires an AS-Interface address. For addressing purposes, the
6 Only one power supply unit is needed to supply power to the
slaves on the up to 200 m long segment. extension plug plus is simply plugged on the 3RK1 904-2AB01
addressing unit.
The extension plug / extension plug plus has integrated under-
voltage detection for monitoring the AS-Interface voltage in
order to be sure that the necessary voltage still exists at the end
of the bus cable. Undervoltage is signaled on the extension plug
by means of a diagnostics LED. The extension plug plus is
equipped with an AS-Interface slave and communicates this
diagnostics information directly to the AS-Interface master.

6/150 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Extension plugs

■ Design (continued)
with Repeater

Power Power
Master Supply Supply

Slave Slave Slave Repeater Slave Slave Slave

100 m 100 m

with Extension Plug

Power
Master Supply
Extension
Plug
Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave

NSA0_00370a
200 m

Topology of an AS-Interface network with a size of 200 m

6
The extension plug / extension plug plus is connected using an The extension plug plus is equipped with an AS-Interface slave.
M12 plug-in connection and most easily realized with the help of Instead of the diagnostics LED, the extension plug plus commu-
the 3RX9 801-0AA00 AS-Interface M12 feeder to IP67 degree of nicates the diagnostics information directly to the AS-Interface
protection. master. Two different voltage values can be set as threshold
value. Using two diagnostics bits it is possible to distinguish
Depending on the size of an AS-Interface segment and the between brief and lengthy voltage drops.
power consumption (the power consumption varies with the
number of stations connected), it is important to make sure that For particularly large AS-Interface networks the maximum possi-
the voltage drop along the AS-Interface cable does not become ble cable length can be increased further by using repeaters.
excessive. To guarantee that even the remotest slave is still sup- Please note that when a repeater and an extension plug / exten-
plied with the necessary minimum voltage, the extension plug sion plug plus are used together, the series connection of re-
has a voltage monitor. With the extension plug, any undershoot- peaters is not possible. Hence the maximum possible distance
ing of the minimum voltage in accordance with the AS-Interface from the master to a slave is 400 m and the absolute maximum
specification is clearly indicated by flashing of a green LED; cable length is 600 m. The parallel connection of repeaters for
a correct AS-Interface voltage is signaled by steady illumination a star-shaped configuration with segments up to 200 m long
of the green LED. The undervoltage detection has a delay for the respectively is possible.
LED indication in order to recognize also short-time voltage dips
of the type which occur, for example, when actuators are
switched.

Master
Power Power Power
Supply Supply Supply
Extension Extension Extension
Plug Plug Plug
Slave Slave Repeater Slave Slave Repeater Slave Slave
NSA0_00371a

200 m 200 m 200 m

600 m

Maximum network size with repeaters and extension plug (master at center of network)

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/151

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Extension plugs

■ Function

7 A S -i
7 1 )
x
> 5 m s
< 5 m s < 5 0 m s
_> 5 0 m s = 0 = 1
0 V J
5 m s 5 m s
D 3 IN
c a . 1 0 0 m s c a . 1 0 0 m s 1 ) 7 x = 2 6 ,5 V (P L C D 1 O U T = 0 )
D 2 IN 7 x = 2 3 V (P L C D 1 O U T = 1 )
N S A 0 _ 0 0 4 0 5
5 0 m s

Transmission of the diagnostic signal with the extension plug plus

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface extension plugs1) 3RK1 901-1MX00
• Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface segment
• Undervoltage monitoring signal by means of diagnostics LED
AS-Interface extension plugs plus1) 3RK1 901-1MX01
• Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface segment
• Undervoltage monitoring signal through integrated AS-Interface slave to AS-Inter-
face master
3RK1 901-1MX00
Accessories
6 AS-Interface M12 feeders 3RX9 801-0AA00
• For adaptation of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard round cable
• Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable
3RX9 801-0AA00 • M12 socket for connection of standard round cable
• Degree of protection IP67

1)
For connection to the AS-Interface flat cable you need the AS-Interface M12 feeder, which must be ordered separately
(see section "Accessories").

6/152 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Addressing units

■ Overview
To be able to participate in data exchange with the master, all
stations have to be addressed before the AS-Interface network
is configured. This can be done
• Offline by means of an addressing unit or
• Online using the master of the AS-Interface system.
The addresses themselves are the values 1 to 31 (or 1A to 31A
and 1B to 31B for the extended AS-Interface specification 2.1).
A new slave that has not yet been addressed has the address 0.
It is recognized accordingly by the master as a new slave that
has not yet been addressed and as such is not yet included in
the normal communication.
The address can be assigned at random, i.e. it makes no differ-
ence whatsoever if the slave with address 21 begins or if the first
slave is actually issued with address 1.

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface addressing units 3RK1 904-2AB01
• For active AS-Interface modules, intelligent sensors and actuators
• According to AS-Interface Version 2.1
• Including expanded addressing mode
• Scope of supply:
- One addressing unit
- One operating manual (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian)
- one addressing cable (1.5 m, with jack plug)
6
3RK1 904-2AB01
Accessories
FK-E coupling module, with integrated addressing socket1) 3RK1 901-1MA00
for addressing user modules
M12 addressing cables to M121) 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• For addressing2) slaves with M12 connection, e.g. K60R modules or light curtains
• When using the current version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• 1.5 m
Addressing cables, with jack plug, to M123) Z236A
• Included in scope of supply of of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit
• 1.5 m

Addressing cables, with banana plug, to M12 3RK1 901-3RA00

• For addressing slaves with M12 connection, e.g. K60R modules
• When using the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit

3RK1 901-3RA00

1)
Not included in scope of supply of of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit.
2)
Note: A 3-pole cable must be used because the addressing unit uses
PIN 2, 4 and 5 for IR addressing.
3)
Can be ordered only from the following address:
Gossen-Metrawatt GmbH, Thomas-Mann-Str. 16-20, 90471 Nürnberg, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0)911/8602-111, Fax: 0911/8602-777,
E-mail: info@gmc-instruments.com

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/153

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
AS-Interface analyzers

■ Overview ■ Benefits
• Simple and user-friendly operation enables diagnostics of AS-
Interface networks without help from specialists
• Speedy troubleshooting thanks to intuitive display in statistics
mode
• Test logs provide verification of the state and quality of the
installation for service and approval
• Recorded logs facilitate remote diagnostics by technical
assistance
• Comprehensive trigger functions enable exact analysis
• Process data can be monitored online

■ Application
Online statistics

The AS-Interface analyzer is used to test AS-Interface networks.

It enables systematic troubleshooting and permanent monitor-
ing.
Installation errors, e.g. loose contacts or EMC interference under
extreme loads, can be revealed by this device.
Thanks to the easy-to-use software the user can assess the qual-
ity of complete networks even if he lacks detailed specialist
knowledge of AS-Interface. In addition it is an easy matter with
6 the AS-Interface analyzer to create test logs from the records
produced, thus providing documentation for start-ups and ser-
vice assignments.
For advanced AS-Interface users there are trigger functions for
detailed diagnostics.
Connection

Master
Branch M12

Slave Slave Slave Slave

NSA0_00359b

AS-Interface Analyzer PC
This mode provides a quick overview of the existing AS-Interface
system. The error rates are presented per slave in a traffic-light
The AS-Interface analyzer follows the communication on the function (green, yellow, red).
AS-Interface network as a passive station. The unit is supplied
simultaneously from the AS-Interface cable. The bus configuration and the currently transmitted data of the
slaves are shown in a well arranged presentation.
This analyzer interprets the physical signals on the AS-Interface
network and records the communication. With the expanded statistics function it is possible to determine
the error rates as the number of transmitted or faulty bus mes-
The data thus obtained are transferred through an RS 232 inter- sage frames.
face to a PC such as a notebook, for evaluation with the supplied
diagnostics software. The bundle error overview shows in steps how many multiple
repetitions of message frames occurred in order to enable a se-
lective and look-ahead assessment of the transmission quality.

6/154 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
AS-Interface analyzers

■ Application (continued)
Data mode Trace mode

The presentation of message frames in the style of a classic field

bus analyzer is indispensable for complex troubleshooting.
Extensive trigger functions and recording and viewing filters are
available for this purpose.
An external trigger input and trigger output round off the scope
of functions in order to find even the most difficult errors.
For troubleshooting in connection with safety monitor applica-
tions, changes of status in the code tables of safety slaves are
identified and assessed.
6
Test log

In this mode the analyzer now shows not only the digital input/
output values but also the current analog values and the input
status of the safety slaves.
NSA0_00362

The recorded data of the online statistics are easy to output and
document using a test log. Verification of the state of the plant
can thus be provided for approvals or service assignments.
The new measurement assistant records the bus signals for an
adjustable period, automating the creation of the test log. A stan-
dardized quality test of AS-i plants is thus possible.

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/155

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
AS-Interface analyzers

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface analyzers 3RK1 904-3AB01
• For testing actuator/sensor interface systems
• For service assignments in installations and networks with AS-Interface systems
• Scope of supply:
- AS-Interface analyzers
3RK1 904-3AB01 - RS 232 cable for connecting to PC
- Diagnostics software (CD-ROM) for PC
(Windows 95/98, ME, 2000, NT, XP,
Vista Home Premium / Business /
Ultimate 32)
Accessories
AS-Interface M12 feeders 3RX9 801-0AA00
• For adaptation of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard round cable
• Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable
3RX9 801-0AA00 • M12 socket for connection of standard round cable
• Degree of protection IP67
M12 cable plugs 3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0
• Cable: PUR
• Length: 5 m
• Color: Black
USB/serial adapter 3UF7 946-0AA00-0
To connect a serial PC cable
(for connection to serial PC interface/RS 232) to the USB port of a PC,
recommended for use in conjunction with
• SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
6 • 3RK3 Modular Safety System
• 3RW44 soft starters
• ET 200S/ECOFAST/ET 200pro Motor Starters
• AS-i safety monitor
• AS-Interface analyzers

6/156 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Miscellaneous accessories

■ Selection and ordering data

Version Order No.
AS-Interface system manual
Systemhandbuch · 12/2007

Technical information and overview of the AS-Interface product range from Siemens,
scope: approx. 600 pages
• German edition, paper version (black&white print)1)
AS-Interface / ASIsafe

3RK2 703-3AB02-1AA1
• English edition, paper version (black&white print)2) 3RK2 703-3BB02-1AA1
as-interface

AS-Interface standard distributors, for AS-Interface flat cables

• Current carrying capacity up to 7 A 3RK1 901-1NN00
• Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and standard rail mounting
• Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable is to be terminated in the
distributor and must be ordered separately

3RK1 901-1NN00

AS-Interface compact distributors, for AS-Interface flat cables 3RK1 901-1NN10

Current carrying capacity up to 6 A

3RK1 901-1NN10

AS-Interface M12 feeders

For flat cable For Cable length Cable end
in feeder
3RX9 801-0AA00 AS-i
AS-Interface M12 feeders
M12 socket -- available 3RX9 801-0AA00
6
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end in
feeder
3RK1 901-1NR10 AS-i M12 socket -- not 3RK1 901-1NR10
available
M12 1m not 3RK1 901-1NR11
cable box available
M12 2m not 3RK1 901-1NR12
cable box available
AS-i / Uaux M12 socket -- not 3RK1 901-1NR20
available
M12 1m not 3RK1 901-1NR21
3RK1 901-1NR11 cable box available
M12 2m not 3RK1 901-1NR22
cable box available
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold
For flat cable For Cable length Cable end in feeder
AS-i / Uaux 4-fold M12 socket -- available 3RK1 901-1NR00
delivery includes
coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR00

M12-T distributors 3RK1 901-1TR00

• IP68
3RK1 901-1TR00 • 1 x M12 plug
• 2 x M12 box
M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
For connection of two sensors to one M12 socket with Y connector

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

1) Free-of-charge download from the Internet at

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26250840
2)
Free-of-charge download from the Internet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26250840

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/157

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Miscellaneous accessories

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
M12 addressing cables to M12 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• Standard M12 cable for addressing slaves with M12 connection,
e.g. K60R modules
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
• When using the current version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit
• 1.5 m
Addressing cables, with banana plug, to M12 3RK1 901-3RA00
• For addressing slaves with M12 connection, e.g. K60R modules
• When using the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit

3RK1 901-3RA00

AS-Interface sealing caps M12 3RK1 901-1KA00

for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00

AS-Interface sealing caps M12, 3RK1 901-1KA01

tamper-proof
for free M12 sockets
3RK1 901-1KA01

AS-Interface sealing caps M8 3RK1 901-1PN00

for free M8 sockets

3RK1 901-1PN00

6
AS-Interface seals M20 3RK1 901-1MD00
• For AS-Interface cable, shaped
• For insertion in M20 glands
3RK1 901-1MD00

Cable adapters for flat cables

Connection of AS-Interface cable to metric gland with insulation piercing method
• Continuation using standard cable
- For M16 gland 3RK1 901-3QM00
- For M20 gland 3RK1 901-3QM10
3RK1 901-3QM00
• Continuation using pins
- For M16 gland 3RK1 901-3QM01
- For M20 gland 3RK1 901-3QM11
Cable clips for cable adapters 3RK1 901-3QA00

3RK1 901-3QA00

Cable terminating pieces 3RK1 901-1MN00

For sealing of open cable ends
(shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67

3RK1 901-1MN00

6/158 Siemens IK PI · 2009

 AS-Interface
System components and accessories
Miscellaneous accessories

■ Selection and ordering data (continued)

Version Order No.
K45 mounting plates
• For wall mounting 3RK1 901-2EA00
• For standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-2DA00

3RK1 901-2EA00

Sealing sets 3RK1 902-0AR00

• For K60 mounting plate and standard distributor
• Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
3RK1 902-0AR00 • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal
K60 mounting plates
suitable for all K60 compact modules
• For wall mounting 3RK1 901-0CA00
• For standard rail mounting 3RK1 901-0CB01

3RK1 901-0CA00

Other accessories:
• See Catalog FS 10, section "Proximity Switches"
--> "Accessories"--> "Plug-in Connectors"
See A&D-Mall, section "Sensors, Measurement and Testing
6
Systems" --> "Proximity Switches" "Accessories"
--> "Plug-in Connectors"

Siemens IK PI · 2009 6/159